01 ElevatorComponents en Interaktiv-09-2017

Elevator Components
Best Quality - Made in Germany
EN 81-
20/ -50
-conform
✓
LE-Centre
More than you expect ...

Table of Contents
Page
Preface and Company Presentation 4
Inquiry Sheet 16
LEKalk 3.0, the tool for drive design and component selection 17
Homepage LiftEquip, Your information platform 20
LE-Centre 21
Drive Units and Geared Machine, TW- and W-Series 27
Frequency Inverter
Elevator motors 46
Drum drives 52
Emergency Brake System NBS 57
Gearless Machine, PMC- and DAF-Series 59

MO61, Solutions with PMC Gearless 79
Compact Gearless, SC-Series 91
External Rotor Gearless, DAB-Series 97
Drive Accessories, Brake Control, UCM-Modul 101
Frequency Inverter MFC and MFR with regeneration 109
Safety- and Car Sling FleCS 119
Elevator Components
Counterweight GTK, the Variable Solution for many Installation Situations 127
Progressive Safety/Braking System 131
Overspeed Governor and Accessories 135
Oil and Lift Buffers, Telescopic Buffer Uprights 143
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides 151
Rope Pulleys and Accessories 163
Doors Comfort Door S8A/K8A 167
Modernisation for Door Drive F9 187
Kit LEMoS®, the Modular Modernisation Solution 189
Car Feature Lighting 217
Safety Basic Safety Practices for Lifts 220
Calendar 221
The TEAM of LiftEquip 222
More
informatio
n to
our syste
ms in the
"The LEA ®
Family "
LiftEquip reserves the right to alter its products wit-
hout prior warning.
Non-contractual document with no binding effects. - Catalog
2 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 3

Preface Location and International Alignment
Always where you need us
Dear Sir/Madam,
As usual, we will be presenting our comprehensi-

ve product portfolio in our component catalogue.
Our LEA family lift systems are laid out clearly in
another catalogue, so that the right information is
available to you, depending on your needs. Both
catalogues can be downloaded from our homepage
www.liftequip.com or obtained from our sales
department if you prefer a printed version. Contact
data can be found on the last page.
Apart from several updates of technical information,

the following have been included in the component
catalogue for the first time:
• Power ranges and technical data of motors, which we use for our W- and TW series geared machines. Europe ●
North America Asia
• Expansion of our modernisation solutions with PMC gearless drives.
• Apart from our tried-and-tested MO61S PMC machine frame, our product range now also includes the new
MO61E (E for Extended). It increases the rope departure (ASL) to 1206 mm. Both frames feature variable adjust-
ment options for the ASL size and can be easily disassembled, which facilitates installation in cramped machine-
room situations. Africa
• The successful TCS car frame was phased out upon the conversion to EN81-20/50 and replaced by the modern
FleCS car frame. The FleCS car frame features great variability, lower weight and clearly defined and described South America
interfaces to the cabin. Deployment of the FleCS car frame in our LEA Comfort lift system is standard.
Australia
• Finally, we have expanded the r range of the gearless PMC125 series. The complete PMC125 drive series up to
1000 kg (2:1) is now available with the PMC125L. The PMC125S (450kg) and PMC125M (630kg) were success-
fully launched some time ago.
We greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you every success in looking for the solution that fits you best.
LiftEquip’s team would be pleased to advise you. You can find our contact data on the cover page at the end of the
catalogue.
What occurs to you when you think of elevators? What do you consider particularly important when you are choosing
We look forward to working with you.
a provider of elevators? No doubt you expect safety and reliability, and want products you can trust. After all, you are
Best regards deciding on an investment that you do not want to regret in future.
As LiftEquip, the renowned provider of components for elevators, we know your requirements and expectations very
Your LiftEquip team
precisely. Our products and services, in the same way as our company and actions, have been aligned to these requi-
rements and expectations. You receive full support where you need it. Our international alignment means that we know
the national legal and technical requirements in your country.
Thousands of highly satisfied customers have been placing their trust in us for many decades. Alongside the „big
players“ in the industry, many small and medium-sized elevator companies and service operations are among our cus-
tomers. What they appreciate is that we know more about elevators than almost anyone else!

Range of Products High-Quality Components for your Elevator
From the Component to the Complete Systems
Whether you are planning a low-cost standard elevator or a premium installation that will be subjected to high loads, and Solutions for modernisation
whether your elevator is to run in a closed shaft or as a representative panorama system: we cover the entire range of We have developed very special solutions for the modernisation of existing elevator systems. Variable in dimensions,
applications from passenger to freight elevators, and deliver all the important components for your elevator. our compact and highly modern drives can be easily adapted to almost any circumstances. With a modification, you
reliably bring your installation up to date with regard to safety, comfort and energy consumption.
Drives
With our elevator drives, you can choose between the energy-efficient, gearless drives or the legendary gear drives for
virtually any range of speed and rated load. A balanced system with matching frequency control ensures outstanding
running performance on every drive.
Gears Gearless Inverter Modernisation
ModKit MO61 S/E
ModKit MO61 D4
LEMoS ®

Range of Products High-Quality Components for your Elevator
From the Component to the Complete Systems
More
Safety Doors Kits - The LEA - Family
® informatio
n to
our syste
ms in the
"The LEA ®
Family "
- Catalog
Safety gear frames and safety technology Overall system in focus

Another centrepiece is the safety gear frame in which your elevator car is mounted to insulate it. Our safety technology All of our products meet the applicable requirements of European regulations and are certified for many countries. They
components are space-saving and easily accessible, integrated in the safety gear frame. It goes without saying that the are designed and built according to the state of the art, have long service lives and are very reliable.
comprehensive range of products also includes all other safety devices.
We pay particular attention to the function, co-ordination and availability of the entire elevator on designing our compo-
nents. This is why you also get components in finely graded construction sizes, each of which has the optimal perfor-
Doors
mance and price for your elevator.
The comfort elevator doors S8A / K8A be in people - employed and freight elevators with high demands on quiet running,
lifting height and comfort. Whether for a new installation or for a modernisation: with our components, you establish the basis for an outstanding
The shaft doors are 81-58 brand tested for fire resistance in accordance with DIN EN. The extensive range of options elevator and always make a good decision in favour of an economical investment!
(SA - special designs) the door is suitable for use under special requirements.

Consulting for our Customers The Human Factor for Success
Expertise in Elevators Guarantees you have made the right decision
What makes a company good and how does a good company differ from others? We are convinced that the ma-
jor factor is the workforce! Their qualifications and ideas have made us one of the best providers on the market.
This is to remain so in future.
Elevator expertise
Our specialists have the elevator expertise that enables them to adapt to your individual ideas and wishes. This
is the basis for being able to provide you as a customer with skilled and superior support, above all when older
elevator systems or delivery capabilities with respect to spare parts are involved. In the case of an elevator that
is to continue running safely after ten, twenty or more years, our expertise is a great advantage.
Continuous re-qualification
This is why outstanding in-house training and continuous re-qualification are particularly important to us. We
want our employees to know our customers and understand their needs and expectations. Our customers place
high demands on us with respect to safe and reliable elevators. And they are right to do so – after all, a long-term
investment decision is involved!
Every elevator is individual and must be adapted to the type of use in the building and the requirements of the opera-
tor. The elevator should fit into the building harmoniously and ensure smooth transport of passengers and freight. This
is why the choice of the appropriate components is of particular significance. Here, too, we support you as a partner.
Personal consulting
In a personal discussion, we are glad to advise you on the telephone or on site, naturally also in your national lan-
guage. Together we find the optimal solution for your use case. Our aim at all times is to work with you to create an
elevator system with optimised technology and economy.
Configuration program LEKalk 3.0

Our configuration program LEKalk 3.0 contains all of our experience from theory and practice. The relevant criteria
are queried to ensure a reliable selection of products and construction sizes. Alongside the performance data such
as rated load and speed, the so-called handling capacity has a decisive influence. The programs deliver you planning
data and also the complete documentation that you require for registration and approval of the elevator system. All
requirements of the new Lift Directive 2014/33/EU and the EN 81-20/-50 considered.

High-End Technology High-Quality Components for your Elevator
Production with top technology - at an attractive price for you
Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production

has a decisive influence on the quality of our products. This is why we
invest in the latest processes, machines and systems.
Certified quality
We guarantee the high quality level with certified processes. Quality assu-
rance checks are performed at each work step.. In our own test laboratory,
we use a highly precise 3-D measuring unit. Nothing is left to chance.
Our certifications document this impressively:
- Quality management ISO 9001
- Environmental management ISO 14001
- Energy Management ISO 50001
- Occupational health and safety management OHSAS 18001.
Production at the elevator specialist

One important aspect of an elevator is good preparation of the compo-
nents for installation in the shaft. The metal plate parts must not be sharp-
edged. This is why we use a laser to cut them without burrs. The exact
fitting accuracy of the parts is achieved with a modern bending centre.
Excessive tolerances can only be balanced out on the construction site
very laboriously.
The drive is the component in the elevator that is subjected to the highest
stress. A long service life and reliability for gears are only achieved with
precise production of the gear teeth. We do this with special machines and
by exploiting our extensive experience. The same applies to the motors of
the gearless drives. The electrical and thermal configuration and the insu-
lation of the windings are the decisive quality characteristics here.
If only metal had no „natural enemies“ such as corrosion ... To counteract
this, we use sheets made of stainless steel or with galvanised surfaces.
Other surfaces are covered with a high-quality powder coating.
Attractive price-performance ratio

Alongside quality, you naturally also expect an affordable product. The
deployment of technologically and economically optimised processes me-
ans that our products are very attractive as regards the price-performance
ratio. Our production can react flexibly when individual wishes or very short
delivery times have to be complied with.
Perfection all the way to delivery

Before our components leave our plant, we test the function of all products
and the completeness of every delivery. Our customers on the construction
site receive correctly adjusted and tested products at all times. This is what
we demand of ourselves!

Reliable Delivery Service and Customer Proximity
Tested products punctually at your elevator system Full support until you are fully satisfied
For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as

an elevator, we offer not only the product itself but also
a comprehensive range of services. We assure you: you
always get our full support!
Consulting and telephone hotline

On our telephone hotline, we advise you with regard to
our products and the best way to deploy them. You talk
to specialists with practical experience who do their best
to answer your questions at all times. We clear up most
of these questions quickly and reliably by telephone, e-
mail or fax. You can also talk to our employees in many
languages.
Proximity to our customers

Close contact to our customers and the practitioners on
the construction site provide us with valuable feedback.
We use this acquired knowledge to continuously adapt the
products and their documentation to the requirements of
our customers to an even greater degree. Profit from this
wealth of experience from elevator construction and from
our close relationship to our customers.
On-site support
For each product, you receive detailed documentation
You order from us and want the products „immediately“? with all technical details, connection values, installation
We can‘t quite manage „immediately“, but we deliver the components to your construction site within a few days! instructions and many valuable tips. The safe and error-
free installation of the products is our number one priority.
How do we manage that?
Should you ever need on-site support, we will send one of
The common products such as drives, frequency controls and components for modernisation are in stock in our
our specialists directly to you and your elevator as quickly
warehouse. Our production plant is also very well situated for road, rail and air transport. We maintain other ware-
as possible.
houses at central locations within Europe. This is an unbeatable advantage when a matter becomes urgent!
Trade fairs and visiting you
What awaits you at the construction site?
Allow us to convince you of our services: we are repre-
We deliver the products safely and suitably packaged for transport to the construction site and prepared for instal-
sented at many trade fairs within Europe. There, you can
lation in line with the needs of the site. Our own installation specialists check and improve this continuously.
inspect our products and have them explained in detail.
We offer solutions We will also be glad to visit you to present our components
The short-term availability of major components rounds off our service and together we find the right solution for directly on site.
your project. Safely – quickly – reliably. Place your trust in the attitude of our employees: „We are
only satisfied when your elevator runs perfectly and reliab-
We make every effort to manufacture the best products for you – so they should also arrive at your site in faultless ly and your wishes have been fulfilled!“
condition and punctually!

Inquiry Sheet LEKalk 3.0
Inquiry Sheet LEKalk 3.0

For components The tool for drive design and component selection
Inquiry Sheet
LEKalk 3.0
2.1 Drive Units Systems have interfaces to the building and compo- The LEkalk 3.0 tool is a design and planning instrument for customers and
Inquiry/Order
nents have interfaces to the neighbouring assem- planners with which a gearless or gear drive can be quickly and efficiently
blies. calculated with the matching inverter, with or without energy feedback.
Customer  Inquiry To
 Order ____________________________
Since only you know your project, we need your As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift configurations
Company LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components input in order to be able to submit a tailor-made
Contact person – comparing gearless or gear drive or designs with or without energy
offer to you, which takes all your requirements into
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929 feedback for lift planning and evaluation and in this way work out the best
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971 account.
E-Mail Kontakt@liftequip.de solution for each application.
Date
The drive design, traction capacity and rope detection can be used as
We have produced enquiry forms for all of our
Machine type  Gear  Gearless products, covering the parameters we need for a calculation, incl. UCM proof, for your registration documents at the body
Controller type  Frequency regulated  2-speed
qualified offer. mentioned.
VVVF inverter  MFC 20/21  MFC 30/31
 MFR  Others
The programme is a local application, which you can download from our
Suspension r  1:1  2:1  3:1  4:1 You can find the enquiry forms for downloading on homepage www.liftequip.de after the corresponding registration. Please
Rated load Q [kg]
___________ our home page or contact our sales. contact us in this regard.
Rated speed vN [m/s]
___________
Car weight F [kg]
incl. Car sling ___________ You will not only assist us in designing your com- Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk 3.0 tool options:
Counterweight GG [kg]
___________
ponents, but also benefit from our serving you as
Travel height [m] quickly as possible. LEKalk 3.0 suggests possible
___________
Compensation rope / chain  Yes  No motors on the basis of the lift
Machine located  Above (MR)  Above beside  Above (HR) If it is very urgent, use LEKalk 3.0 and assemble the
 Below (MR)  Below beside  Below (SP) data and selection of the gear
components needed.
Depth of machine [m]
(if machine not above) ___________ drive. Here you can for example
Machine type Gear  TW 45 C  TW 63 B  TW 130 also indicate whether energy
 TW 160  W 263 C  W 332 C When you place the order, we will once again check
Gearless  PMC 125  DAF 210  SC 300
the technology with you so that you can be sure of feedback is desired.
 PMC 145-2  DAF 270  SC 400
 PMC 170  SC 500
having selected the best product for your needs.
Documentation  German  English  French*  Russian**
Notes:
Page 1 of 2 Issue: 12/2016
After selecting the motor and

type of frequency control (here
with feedback), a selection of
possible inverters is suggested.
Power consumption and power
reserves are likewise stated.

LEKalk 3.0 LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0 LEKalk 3.0

The tool for drive design and component selection The tool for drive design and component selection
LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0
In this way you can create
LEKalk 3.0 shows possible suita- your own offer independently
ble inverters. Power reserves are with price and delivery infor-
stated. mation at any time.
LEKalk 3.0 calculates the trac-

tion capacity on the basis of the
relevant parameters.
The design is for submission

to the responsible monitoring
bodies.
You can add even more compo-

nents via the catalogue function,
such as the base frame, ropes,
car frame and the entire spect-
rum of safety technology.
An employee of LiftEquip would be pleased to assist you with queries and training
courses regarding LEkalk 3.0 and with technical advice.

www.liftequip.com Customer and Training Centre
www.liftequip.com LE-Centre
Your information platform for components and systems
LiftEquip Homepage
Customer and Training Centre

Always online, always up-to-date
Here you can find all the information on
LiftEquip’s products.
Register as a customer and the following
additional documents and tools will be
available to you:
• LEKalk 3.0
• product catalogues
• operating manuals
• type approval certificates
• CAD data
• 3D models In the new LE-centre, we offer the following training courses for you:
• ….
• LEKalk 3.0 course: Here you learn how to handle LEKalk like a professional. The goal of this course is to learn the
finer points of the programme and then use it in everyday work.
Course duration: one day
• MFC/MFR inverter course: In the theoretical part you learn the basics of inverter technology and the correct ins-
tallation and fast start-up of the MFC and MFR inverters. In the practical section you work on our training lift (1000
kg, 17m, 1.6 m/s) to implement what you have learned with exercises and get practical tips and tricks. You must
bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment.
LiftEquip newsletter Modernisation lift car LEMoS®
Course duration: one-and-a-half days
LiftEquip has provided a modular solution for lift modernisations for rated loads up to
To ensure you are always up-to-date, 1050 kg at speeds of 1 m/s in the form of LEMoS®.
*For assistance during commissioning, you can contact our hotline (+49172735 2020).
Flexible means you can keep the parts of your lift whose replacement is not techni-
please register via the home page for our cally necessary and would make little economic sense. This flexibility with the flexible
LEMoS® lift car, which can be combined with the doors of different manufacturers, is
newsletter. this solution’s USP. Customised modernisation solutions, which make allowance for
technical as well as economic considerations, can be put together here irrespective • Home lifts Gulliver and Orion course: Learn the installation and start-up of the home lift on our Gulliver training
of the old lift’s manufacturer.
model. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes.
You can find more advantages of the LEMoS® system below or on our homepage:
https://www.liftequip.com/newsletter.html www.liftequip.com/products/systems/lemos.html Course duration: one day
LEMoS® - in a nutshell:
• Maintenance and service on LiftEquip motors: You learn the basics of gear drive and gearless drive technology
• The lift car width and depth can be configured in millimetre steps – hence optimal use of the existing
shaft.
• Very compact. Micrometer: car width + 40 mm.
as well as everything needed to maintain and correctly set the drives of LiftEquip and replacing the rotary encoder
• Short standstill times thanks to short installation and delivery times.
• Prepared for doors of many different well-known markt manufacturers. As a result, it is possible to react
and traction sheave. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes.
with the flexibility required to all kinds of demands.
• Modern lift car design and high quality appearance. Course duration: one day
LEMoS® arose out of modernisation for modernisation! Modernisation can be this easy! Find out from
us today with the question sheet.
• LEA assembly course: You learn how to assemble the LiftEquip LEA MRL building kit in real lift shafts. We show
Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S
you the version of frameless assembly. The focus here in particular is on the installation of the machine base frame.
Extremely flexible and economic!
We would like to present another LiftEquip modernisation solution – our new Mod-
You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment.
Kit MO61S machine base frame. It is a pre-installed machine base frame, specially
developed for our gearless PMC145-2 M/XL and L/XL for 1:1 suspension, rated load
Course duration: one day
up to 675 kg and 1.0 m/s.
The ASL dimension (distance of lift car suspension to the counterweight suspension)
can be set flexibly from 555 to 765 mm and is delivered with rope guard. A hand
release and hand wheel are optionally available. The frame is pre-installed and can Please contact us if you are interested in one of the courses.
be supplied from stock with the drive.
www.liftequip.com/products/systems/modkit-mo61s.html

Technical Report
Own Notes Technical Report

LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
Technical Report - From components to home lifts

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
LiftEquip – from components to home lifts UK
a matching rope drum for two ropes
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ for the familiar TW63, TW130 and
TW160 gear systems. These can be
used to move rated loads of 450 to
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1200 kg and, in accordance with EN
81-1, speeds of up to 0.63 m/s can be
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ achieved. This is a clever alternative if
other drive system can only be in-
stalled with high overhead or, in ac-
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ cordance with EN 81-70, a larger eleva-
tor car has to be installed.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
The legendary gear systems
From the small TW45 all the way to the
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ mighty W332, LiftEquip offers a very
wide range of gear systems, unsur-
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ passed by any other provider. "Above
all during modernisation, the optional
horizontal or vertical design of smaller
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Clearly structured trade fair booth: gear systems and door (front), gearless and frequency gear systems means they can be
converters (back), system parts (left) and home lift (right) adapted to almost any spatial circum-
stances," says sales expert Thomas
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Bäzner. At LiftEquip, the continuous
enhancement of the gear systems
LiftEquip was present for the 11th The drum drive is back
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ means that they are a genuine alterna-
time at the largest elevator trade fair
Even today, drum drive elevators are tive to modern gearless drives from a
interlift 2013 in Augsburg. Once again
still in operation in numerous build- technical and economic perspective.
this year, interesting innovations
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ings. For these elevators and for older Their high efficiency enables energy-
awaited the visitors: the drum drive
installations with small car floor areas, efficient operation. The gear systems
for elevators without counterweight;
the drum drive using modern technol- of the TW model series are optionally
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ the gearless for "adjacent" with trac-
ogy is a good modernisation solution. available with an emergency brake sys-
tion sheave in the shaft; the wide
The fact that there is no counterweight tem conforming with EN 81-1:A3. The
range of balanced components con-
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ forming with EN 81-1/2:A3; the home
enables better use of the shaft cross large gear systems of the W model se-
section and a larger elevator car can ries move high rated loads of up to 6
lift for retrofitting inside and outside
be installed. Even hydraulic systems metric tonnes.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ of buildings.
can easily be converted to a frequency-
LiftEquip is consistently pointing the controlled drum drive. LiftEquip offers
way as component supplier and solu-
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tion provider.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Uniform colour assignment for

all drives
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Trade fair visitors to Hall 1 found the
well-known exhibitors in their usual
places. In line with tradition, LiftEquip
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Elevator Components from Neuhausen
near Stuttgart could be found on the
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ right-hand side with a clearly struc-
tured booth layout. It was conspicuous
and well received that all gear and
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ gearless drives are now painted with
an environmentally friendly and rug-
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ged water-based paint in a noble black-
grey. This has provided the high-quali-
ty drive components from LiftEquip
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ with a uniform colour assignment,
from the reliable drives all the way to The modern gear systems with high efficiency are still very much in demand,
the progressive frequency converters. above all for modernisation
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
78 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Technical Report Technical Report

LiftEquip - From components to home lifts LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
generations of converters in black range is the Gulliver home lift: a free- Norbert Blum. "This makes Gulliver an house and are made in Germany. They

housings are configured to conform standing elevator with its own shaft ideal retrofit solution in the private and are configured with the extensive expe-
with EN 81-1:A3 and do not require and a travel height of up to 15 metres public sector. This is confirmed by rience of a system provider and opti-
contactors, which makes them very with a maximum of 5 landings. The many trade fair visitors. We are very mised in relation to one another. Our
quiet. In addition to many options, they system is configured in accordance excited about the way the market will customers appreciate the ability of our
include an integrated brake control, with EN 81-41 and Machines Directive develop." salespeople to provide useful informa-
power filter, interface cards, as well as 2006/42/EC. The hydraulic drive ena- tion alongside their commitment, also
a display. Connection per plug&play bles a rated load of 300 or 400 kg with Skills in development, produc- where special wishes may be involved.
makes commissioning very simple. a speed of 0.15 m/s. Only 10 cm is re- To ensure long-term customer loyalty,
tion and system application
The MFC model series has been ex- quired as the floor recess; alternative- we attach high value to skilled consult-
tended to include the construction siz- ly, an access ramp can be installed. What are the special features of Lift- ing, and reliable service, all the way to
es 100R, 155R and 310R with nominal The shaft head height is only 2350 Equip and the offered products? Man- rapid spare parts supply." On request,
The gearless range encounters substantial output power of up to 140 kVA. The de- High-quality S8A comfort door with mm. The doors can be arranged on aging Director Andreas Hönnige pro- interested customers are very wel-
interest: filigree model series PMC145 vices of the MFR model series for syn- glass door panels and sturdy TW160 gear three sides. "Gulliver is suitable for set- vides some insight: "The products of come to tour one of the largest produc-
(front) and strong Compact Gearless (left) with emergency braking device
chronous drives have an integrated en- ting up indoors and outdoors," explains LiftEquip have been developed in- tion locations for elevators in Europe.
ergy recovery unit and are available in
the performance classes from 5.5 to nents was exhibited on a large shelf
Gearless drives remain first 18.5 kW. within the main trade fair booth: safety
choice
gears, overspeed governors, buffers,
Arranged in a circle were the impres- Solutions for all drive types guides and elevator car LED lighting
sively filigree gearless drives of the with A3 conformity system. Markus Bruckmeyer, Sales
PMC145 model series in the construc- Manager for Germany: "These impor-
Under the key safety concept UCM
tion sizes from "S" (rated load 275 kg / tant components and many other small
(Unintended Car Movement), LiftEquip
suspension 1:1) to "XL" (1000 kg / 2:1). parts concerning every aspect of eleva-
provides solutions in accordance with
On request, these and the larger tors can also be ordered directly from
EN 81-1/2:A3 for all kinds of drives
PMC170 are available together with the LiftEquip. Our customers appreciate
ranging from the hydraulic installation
modernisation solution ModKit MO61. this, as it rounds off our range of prod-
to the geared drive to the gearless ele-
This enables very simple conversion of ucts perfectly."
vator. A brochure provides a clearly ar-
existing elevators with gear systems to
ranged overview of which certified
a gearless drive. The options range
components can be used for each drive
New: Gulliver home lift
from suspension 1:1 up to 1000 kg /
system. This can be seen at www. To date, LiftEquip has aligned its offer-
1.0 m/s and/or in 2:1 up to 1000 kg / ing to components and drive products
EN81-A3.com.
1.6 m/s. Under the key words "Geared for traction elevators. Brand new in the
to Gearless", another modernisation
The S8A / K8A comfort door for
solution with DAF210 and/or DAF270
was presented as a new product. The sophisticated applications
system is suitable for upward or down- On the other side of the trade fair
ward rope departure and for the trac- booth, LiftEquip exhibited the S8A
tion sheave in the shaft or in the ma- landing door for the matching K8A car
chine room. In all cases, secure door. Günter Stoll, Sales Manager for
support in relation to the building, pro- Export North / East: "This door series
tected from vibration, is ensured. The has been developed for deployment in
highlight: existing circumstances such high-quality elevator systems. The de-
as wall openings, rope pulleys, safety sign is very solid and the frequency-
gear frame and counterweight do not controlled door drive is very quiet. The
have to be changed. As could be ex- incredibly wide range of version op-
pected, many expert visitors were very tions enables adaptation of the door to
interested. Upwards, the range of virtually any customer requirement.
products is rounded off by the Com- This door series clearly stands out
pact Gearless SC300/400 using syn- from the broad mass of standard
chronous technology. doors." It was only possible to exhibit a
few variants on the trade fair booth.
Frequency converters from 5 to The entire performance capability of
more than 50 kW the comfort door is shown in the new
door brochure.
LiftEquip offers a wide range of fre-
quency converters for motor outputs of System components and small
5 to 50 kW or more, for asynchronous
or synchronous drives. They are char-
parts
New product: Gulliver home lift in a
acterised by simple parameter input, It was presented on a separate trade free-standing shaft, ideal for retrofitting
and setup indoors or outdoors.
quick initial operation and safe evacua- fair booth two years ago, but this year Picture: LiftEquip GmbH Elevator
tion and maintenance. The modern a small selection of system compo- Components
80 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6 82 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6

Gears
Own Notes TW- and W-Series
Gears
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Product description 28

Duty range, Performance Matrix Gears 30
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
TW45C 34
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ TW63B 36
TW130 38
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ TW160 40
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ W263C 42
W332C 44
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Elevator motors 46
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Drum drives 52

Emergency Brake System NBS 57
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Colouring for all Drives 100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Gears Gears
TW- and W-Series EN 81-

20/ -50
TW- and W-Series
Product Description -conform
Product Description
Gears
Gears
All gear drives are designed with Machine base frame TW45C up to 1000 kg* TW63B up to 2000 kg* TW130 up to 3500 kg*
VVVF motors in B5 configuration A series of base frames are available
with flexible coupling and as result in connection with the gear drives,
provide maximum travel comfort. De- e.g. with and without diverting pulleys,
pending on your space requirements, for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions, in
these gear drives are available with left or right designs and in general for
a vertically or horizontally installed downward traction sheaves. The rope
motor (TW160, W263C und W332C distance dimension can be chosen
only horizontal). flexibly according to the circumstan- • Horizontal/vertical version • Horizontal/vertical version • Horizontal/vertical version
Pole-changing (AC2) motors are also ces on the spot as a result of suitable Emergency brake system NBS • Right or left hand • Right or left hand • Right or left hand
optionally available for the geared perforation patterns for the attachment optional • Emergency braking system optional • Emergency braking system optional • Emergency braking system optional
• pole changing • pole changing
machine TW63B. of the drive and diverting pulley. The TW45C to TW160:
One- to three-stage worm gears base frame design left / right can be The certified brake fulfills the require-
ensure continuous smooth running. chosen irrespective of the left / right ment as braking device against over-
Tight production tolerances and the traction sheave. speed according to EN 81-20 /5.6.6
use of high quality materials preserve The machines base frames are moun- and against unintentional movement
smooth running. Synthetic transmis- ted on anti-vibration elements. of the car according EN 81-20 /5.6.7.
sion oil ensures optimal lubrication
and high efficiency. Optimal adjustment to your lift TW160 up to 4000 kg* W263C up to 5000 kg* W332C up to 6000 kg*
The hardened, low-wear traction Traction sheaves in all directions are EN81 20/-50
sheave has a long service life. possible, but must be ordered as Our drives meet all requirements
custom-build. with regard to the above standards,
The service brake keeps the lift in particular the approval of safety
safe as dual-circuit disc brake in the Also optionally as Ex part brakes and the rope guard.
TW45C and from the TW63B as An extended traction sheave shaft
dual-circuit external contracting shoe with wall bearing, vapour-proof shaft
brake, even if a pitch circle fails. duct and the optional accompanying • Horizontal version • Horizontal version • Horizontal version
• Right or left hand • Right or left hand • Right or left hand
base frame permit the use of standard
• Emergency braking system optional • Worm gear with combined plained • Worm gear with combined plained
machines for Ex areas.
bearings bearings
*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension

Gears Gears
TW- and W-Series TW- and W-Series

Duty range for rope suspension 1:1 Duty range for rope suspension 2:1
Gears
Gears
3800 8000
3600 7500
3400 7000
3200 6500
3000 6000
W332C
2800 W332C 5500
2600 5000
rated load (kg)

W332C
2400 4500
rated load (kg)
2200 4000 TW160

W332C
2000 3500
TW160
1800 3000
TW130
1600 2500
1400 TW130 TW160 2000

TW63B
1200 1500 TW130 TW160
1000 1000
TW63B TW130 TW45C TW63B
800 500
0,5 0,8 1,0 1,3 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,3 2,5

600 TW63B
rated speed (m/s)
TW45C
400 Data can vary depending on car weight and travel height
0,5 0,8 1,0 1,3 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,3 2,5
rated speed (m/s)
Data can vary depending on car weight and travel height

Gears Gears
TW- and W-Series TW- and W-Series

Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 Performance Matrix Gears 2:1
Travel height 25 m 40 m Travel height 25 m 40 m

Gears
Gears
Operating speed 0,63 m/s 0,8 m/s 1 m/s 1,2 m/s 1,6 m/s 2 m/s Operating speed 0,63 m/s 0,8 m/s 1 m/s 1,2 m/s 1,6 m/s
Q= 450kg TW45C, 46:1, TS440 TW45C,46:1,TS520 *TW45C,32:1,TS440 TW45C,32:1,TS590 TW45C, 41:2, TS440 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675 Q= 630kg TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 TW45C, 41:2, TS 590 TW45C, 40:3, TS440 TW63B, 43:3, TS 675
F= 950kg 2726 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3366 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3630 kJ/h, 3.8 kW 4872 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 5513 kJ/h, 7 kW 7091 kJ/h, 10 kW F= 1000kg 3234 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3969 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 5039 kJ/h, 7 kW 5555 kJ/h, 7 kW 8150 kJ/h, 10 kW
6,5 A / 10,1 A 8,3 A / 12,3 A 8,9 A / 13,9 A 12,9 A / 21,5 A 13,8A / 21,5 A 22,1 A / 38,8 A 7,9 A / 12,3 A 11 A / 14,5 A 12,4 A / 17,8 A 13,8 A / 19,7 A 25,1 A / 40,4 A
1258 1/min, (NBS) 1352 1/min, (NBS) 1389 1/min, (NBS) 1243 1/min, (NBS) 1424 1/min, (NBS) 1358 1/min, (NBS) 1121 1/min, (NBS) 1424 1/min, (NBS) 1327 1/min, (NBS) 1389 1/min, (NBS) 1298 1/min, (NBS)
MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 630kg TW45C, 32:1,TS360 TW45C, 32:1,TS440 TW45C, 32:1,TS440 TW45C, 41:2, TS360 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675 Q= 1000kg TW45C, 32:1, TS 520 TW45C, 40:3, TS 360 *TW45C, 40:3,TS 360 TW63B, 43:3, TS 510 *TW63B, 43:3, TS 675
F= 1000kg 3595 kJ/h, 3,6 kW 4593 kJ/h, 4,6 kW 5310 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 5686 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 7779 kJ/h, 9,9 kW 9499 kJ/h, 13,0 kW F= 1500kg 5388 kJ/h, 7 kW 5956 kJ/h, 6,3 kW 6597 kJ/h, 7 kW 9060 kJ/h, 10 kW 11370 kJ/h, 13 kW
8,6 A / 13,3 A 12,8 A / 19 A 12,9 A / 17,9 A 13,7 A / 20 A 23,5 A / 40,2 A 25,7 A / 40,8 A 13,4 A / 16,1 A 15,8 A / 22,2 A 15,9 A / 21,9 A 27,7 A / 43,4 A 30,2 A / 47,9 A
Q= 800kg TW45C,32:1,TS320 TW45C,32:1,TS320 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 TW63B, 48:2, TS 510 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 Q= 1600kg TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW130, 43:3, TS 640
F=1050kg 4407 kJ/h, 5,0 kW 5176 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 6305 kJ/h, 6,9 kW 6692 kJ/h, 10 kW 8914 kJ/h, 10 kW 11005 kJ/h, 12,7 kW F= 1800kg 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 9716 kJ/h, 12,9 kW 11577 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 14134 kJ/h, 15,6 kW 17993 kJ/h, 27,5 kW
11,7 A / 17,2 A 12,8 A / 15,2 A 14,6 A / 22,5 A 20,5 A / 29,5 A 27,2 A / 39 A 29,3 A / 46,5 A 23,7 A / 31,8 A 25,6 A / 37,4 A 31,1 A / 45,1 A 35,9 A / 53,4 A 46,8 A / 65,6 A
Q= 1000kg TW63B, 48:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2,TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640 Q= 2000kg TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2, TS540 *TW130, 45:2, TS640 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 640
F= 1200kg 5277 kJ/h, 7 kW 6370 kJ/h, 9 kW 7422 kJ/h, 10 kW 8939 kJ/h, 9,8 kW 12198 kJ/h, 16 kW 15039 kJ/h, 20,5 kW F= 2200kg 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 21916 kJ/h, 27,5 kW
12,5 A / 18 A 20,4 A / 30,5 A 22,9 A / 32,3 A 27 A /42,4 A 30,8 A / 46,8 A 38,2 A / 57 A 28 A / 38,1 A 29,3 A / 42,1 A 34 A / 48,1 A 43,9 A / 65,2 A 56,8 A / 77,8 A
Q= 1200kg *TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 52:1, TS 640 TW130, 42:1, TS 640 TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640 Q= 2500kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640 *TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 540
F= 1400kg 7099 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 9179 kJ/h, 11,1 kW 10762 kJ/h, 11,2 kW 11494 kJ/h, 16,0 kW 14917 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 18395 kJ/h, 20,5 kW F= 2500kg 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 17805 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 18859 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33,5 kW
17 A / 26,6 A 21,7 A / 33 A 25,5 A / 38,5 A 28,6 A / 43,9 A 37,4 A / 56,4 A 46,8 A / 67,6 A 30,2 A / 40,8 A 36 A / 49,4 A 44,6 A / 60,4 A 47,2 A / 71,3 A 67 A / 80,3 A
Q= 1600kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 45:2,TS 640 Q= 3000kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW160, 41:3, TS 640
F= 1800kg 9737 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 10563 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 12597 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 14244 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 18007 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 22441 kJ/h, 27,5 kW F= 2800kg 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 17357 kJ/h, 20,5kW 19078 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 23444 kJ/h, 32,6 kW 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW
23,9 A / 34,2 A 26,8 A / 39,2 A 31,3 A / 46,1 A 36,9 A / 49,9 A 45,8 A / 68,2 A 57,3 A / 81,8 A 36,2 A / 47 A 42,8 A / 58,5 A 50,9 A / 61,1 A 59,5 A / 86,1 A 79,4 A / 129 A
Q= 1800kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW1301, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 *TW160, 45:2, TS 640 Q= 3500kg TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 57:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 *W 332C, 57:3, TS 800
F= 2000kg 10891 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 11791 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 14086 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 17041 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 20881 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 23805 kJ/h, 33,5 kW F= 3200kg 16973 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 19171 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 23354 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 26088 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 36107 kJ/h, 45,4 kW
26,6 A / 37,4 A 29,9 A / 43 A 35 A / 50,7 A 38,3 A / 53,3 A 52,9 A / 78,8 A 59,8 A / 87,9 A 38,6 A / 46,4 A 48,2 A / 63,6 A 58,8 A / 77,4 A 68,6 A / 81,8 A 97,9 A / 179,1 A
1159 1/min, (NBS) 1188 1/min, (NBS) 1238 1/min, (NBS) 955 1/min, (NBS) 1218 1/min, (NBS) 1343 1/min, (NBS) 1003 1/min, (NBS) 1361 1/min, (NBS) 1343 1/min, (NBS) 1611 1/min, (NBS) 1452 1/min
Q= 2000kg TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640 Q= 4000kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640
F= 2200kg 11336 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 13544 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 16063 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 18412 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 23266 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 31384 kJ/h, 36,2 kW F= 3500kg 18719 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 22169 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25900 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW
24,3 A / 33,6 A 30 A / 39,7 A 39,1 A / 57,6 A 44,7 A / 66,8 A 59 A / 87 A 73,7 A / 113,2 A 45,8 A / 59,2 A 55,4 A / 75 A 64,7 A / 85,7 A 86,6 A / 131,6 A
936 1/min, (NBS) 990 1/min, (NBS) 1225 1/min, (NBS) 1253 1/min, (NBS) 1217 1/min, (NBS) 1224 1/min 1316 1/min, (NBS) 1218 1/min, (NBS) 1343 1/min, (NBS) 1468 1/min
MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2200kg TW160, 50:1, TS640 TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 Q= 4500kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 *W 332C,57:3,TS640
F= 2400kg 12777 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 14737 kJ/h, 15,3 kW 17637 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 18903 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 27506 kJ/h, 31,1 kW 31658 kJ/h, 42,0 kW F= 4000kg 19722 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 25747 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW
26,9 A / 36,6 A 36,4 A / 51,1 A 42,9 A / 62,4 A 46,7 A / 70 A 70,3 A / 107,1 A 80,6 A / 130,9 A 49,2 A / 64,3 A 64,8 A / 87,9 A 78 A / 120 A 86,3 A / 172,4 A
940 1/min, (NBS) 1194 1/min, (NBS) 1224 1/min, (NBS) 1253 1/min, (NBS) 1160 1/min 1450 1/min 1316 1/min, (NBS) 1415 1/min 1450 1/min 1361 1/min
MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2400kg TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS640 W263C,41:2,TS540 W332C, 46:2,TS700 Q= 5000kg W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C 41:2, TS 540 W332C, 46:2,TS640
F= 2600kg 13885 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 16645 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 18262 kJ/h, 23,0 kW 22661 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 29694 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 36143 kJ/h, 45,4 kW F= 4500kg 24781 kJ/h, 29,9 kW 30548 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 35725 kJ/h, 45,4 kW * 50% compensation of rated load
29,2 A / 39,2 A 36,1 A / 46,9 A 50,5 A / 71,2 A 57,3 A / 82 A 71,3 A / 107,9 A 93,6 A / 176,7 A 63,4 A / 88,6 A 72,9 A / 101,1 A 95,8 A / 177,5 A Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm]
940 1/min, (NBS) 979 1/min, (NBS) 1045 1/min, (NBS) 1432 1/min 1160 1/min 1255 1/min 1114 1/min 1160 1/min 1373 1/min Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM
MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current
[A]
Q= 2600kg W332C, 63:1,TS640 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 *W332C, 46:2,TS640 Q= 5500kg W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 640 *W332C, 46:2,TS640 Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible)
F= 5000kg 28731 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 37993 kJ/h, 45,4 kW Inverter type.
F= 2800kg 16046 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 18431 kJ/h, 24,9 kW 20833 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 26872 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 36445 kJ/h, 45,4 kW
38,3 A / 87,4 A 46,5 A / 70,5 A 52,6 A / 75,4 A 65,1 A / 121 A 82 A / 166,7 A 95,3 A / 173,6 A 70,8 A / 123,9 A 85 A / 163,1 A 98,7 A / 176,3 A
1184 1/min 1132 1/min 1415 1/min 1347 1/min 1288 1/min 1373 1/min 1414 1/min 1409 1/min 1373 1/min Q = Rated load,
MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 F = Maximum mass of car,
TS = Traction sheave diameter,
Q= 2800kg *W332C, 63:1,TS640 W332C, 63:1,TS700 W332C, 47:1,TS640 W332C, 47:1,TS800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 W332C, 46:2, TS 640 Q= 6000kg W332C, 47:1, TS800 W332C, 59:2, TS640 (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake
F= 3000kg 16622 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 19808 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 23550 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 28833 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 38059 kJ/h, 45,4 kW F= 5500kg 31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 36111 kJ/h, 45,4 kW system.
37,9 A / 87,9 A 47,9 A / 101,2 A 58,1 A / 101,9 A 69,7 A / 126,6 A 87,8 A / 175,8 A 97,2 A / 178,3 A 74,6 A / 124,8 A 97 A / 175,3 A
1184 1/min 1375 1/min 1403 1/min 1347 1/min 1288 1/min 1373 1/min 1414 1/min 1409 1/min 1) stronger brake
MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
The calculations are examples, altera- * 50% compensation of rated load Q = Rated load, The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
tions are possible Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] F = Maximum mass of car,
Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM TS = Traction sheave diameter,
Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system.
Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible)
Inverter type. 1) stronger brake
Stand 04/2015
TW-Drives TW-Drives
TW45C EN 81- TW45C

20/ -50
-conform
The ideal solution for light loads

Gears
Gears
• VVVF-motor (5,2 and 7 kW) controlled accurately
• Emergency braking system NBS, optional PERFORMANCE DATA
• Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release
Rated Load Q [kg] Operational Speed v [m/s] Suspension r
• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 320, 360, 440,
320 0,63 - 1,20 1:1
520 or 590 mm
450 0,5 - 1,25 1:1
• Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 250 kg
Special designs are possible 630 0,5 - 1,0 1:1
900 0,4 - 0,63 2:1
1000 0,4 - 1,0 2:1
1300 0,4 2:1
TW45C
horizontal right
TW45C
Motor position horizontal on machine base frame
(pictured with traction sheave on left and with emergency brake system NBS, optional)
Brake release lever

(plug-in type
Technical Data
Gear type TW45C
Axle distance mm 120
Load on shaft (Ft) kN ≤ 30
Ratios 46:1 / 32:1 / 41:2 / 40:3
Oil filling L 5,5
Type of oil synthetic gear oil
Backlash ° 0,03 - 0,07 Bolt connection
Weight kg ca. 105 4xM16 Motor position vertical
Type of protection - Motor IP54 (pictured with traction sheave on left)
Hand wheel mm D270 (plastic)

Actual Value Sensor (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL
WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
Operational Brake
Type Robastop RSZ 60
Braking Torque Nm 2 x 50
Operational Voltage VDC 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 320 360 440 520 590
Rim width mm 102 77 115
max. Numerbrs of grooves 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 DT = 320 360 440 520 590
7x8 5x8 Bolt connection
(z x d) 6 x 11 6 x 11 / 5 x 12 W T = 102 77 115 115 115 4xM16
* Dimensions applicable to D T = 360 mm
Weight kg 30 25 45 55 60
Brake release lever
Subject to modifications
(plug-in type)

TW-Drives TW-Drives
TW63B EN 81- TW63B

20/ -50
-conform
The machine for middle loads

Gears
Gears
• VVVF-motor (5,2 up to 13 kW) controlled
accurately PERFORMANCE DATA
• Emergency braking system NBS, optional
800 0,63 - 2,0 1:1
• Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction
1000 0,63 - 1,2 1:1
sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
• Gear according to ATEX 1000 0,4 - 1,6 2:1
• Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) 1600 0,4 - 1,2 2:1

• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 450, 2000 0,4 - 0,63 2:1
TW63B 510, 520, 590 or 675 mm
horizontal right • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 350 kg TW63B, vertical left hand
Special designs are possible on machine base frame
down beside
Technical Data
Gear type TW63B
Load on shaft (Ft) kN ≤ 43 (rope departure direction downwards)
Ratios 54:1 / 48:1 / 33:1 / 48:2 / 43:3
Oil filling L vertical: ca.11 / horizontal: ca. 9
Backlash ° 0,025 - 0,07
Weight kg ca. 190
Motor pole changing frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor IP54
Hand wheel flywheel rim D270 (plastic)
without WDG100-38-1024 HTL
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational Brake
Type TW63B
Braking Torque Nm max. 2 x 90
Traction Sheave
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 450 510 520 590 675 1 Machine centre of gravity
2 Mount of machine on machine
Rim width mm 132 132 110 132 96
base frame
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8x8 8x8 6x8 3 Operation lever for manual
8x8
(z x d) 7 x 10/11 5 x 13 7 x 10/11 5 x 10/11 brake release (plug-in)
7 x 10/11
6 x 12 6 x 12 4 x 12 kproj. = see product catalog
Weight kg 50 60 50 70

TW-Drives TW-Drives
TW130 EN 81- TW130

20/ -50
-conform
The ideal solution for higher loads

Gears
Gears
• VVVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately
• Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and
1000 0,63 - 2,5 1:1
pedestal bearing (SA 9)
1300 0,63 - 2,5 1:1
• Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended
drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) 1600 0,63 - 1,0 1:1
• Reinforced machine mounting for rope pull resultant - horizontal 1300 0,5 - 2,0 2:1
or vertical pointing upwards (SA1) 2200 0,5 - 1,75 2:1
• Additional terminal block for intermediate terminal 3000 0,5 - 0,8 2:1
TW130
horizontal right connection (SA12)
• Gear according to ATEX
• Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) TW130
• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 720 or 900 mm on machine base frame
Special designs are possible
Technical Data
Gear type TW130
Ratios 52:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 45:2 / 43:3
Oil filling L vertical: ca. 25 / horizontal: ca. 20
Backlash ° 0,02 - 0,06
Weight kg 430
Motor
Motor frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor IP 21 IP 55
Hand wheel D270 / 360 (plastic) D270 / 360 (plastic)
WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational brake
Type TW130
Braking Torque Nm max. 2 x 125 / max. 2 x 200 max. 2 x 125
Traction Sheave
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 540 640 720 900
Rim width mm 150
max. Numerbrs of grooves 5 x 16 6 x 12/13,
(z x d) 7 x 12/13, 8 x 10/11, 10 x 8, 9 x 9 7 x 10/11
Weight kg 75 90 140 150

Subject to modifications kproj. = see product catalog

TW-Drives TW-Drives
TW160 EN 81- TW160

20/ -50
-conform
The cart horse for higher loads

Gears
Gears
• VVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately
• Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave
1800 0,8 - 2,0 1:1
shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
2000 0,8 - 1,2 1:1
• Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct,
extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) 2500 0,63 - 1,6 2:1

• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 720 or 800 mm
TW160 • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 925 kg
horizontal right Special designs are possible
TW160
on machine base frame
Technical Data
Gear type TW160
Ratios 50:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 57:2 / 51:2 / 41:3
Oil filling L ca. 16,5
Backlash ° 0,015 - 0,06
Weight kg ca. 540
Type of protection - Motor IP21 IP55
Hand wheel D360 (plastic)
Operational Brake
Type TW160
Trachtion Sheave
Type Standard SA 4/9
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 640 720 800 640 720 800
Rim width mm 180 160
max. Numerbrs of grooves
8 x 13, 7 x 16 7 x 13, 6 x 16
(z x d)
Weight kg 140 160 190 130 150 180
kproj. = see product catalog

W-Drives W-Drives
W263C W263C
For big travel heights & high loads

Gears
Gears
• VVVF-motor (16 up tp 75 kW) controlled accurately
• Horizontal rope departure (SA1) PERFORMANCE DATA
• Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and
2000 0,8 - 2,0 1:1
pedestal bearing (SA 9)
2200 0,8 - 1,2 1:1
• Reinforced traction sheave shaft (SA13) 4000 0,63 - 1,0 2:1

2:1
W263C
• Gear according to ATEX 4500 0,63 - 1,0
W263C horizontal left
• Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15)
horizontal right
• Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake
• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm
Technical Data
Gear type W263C
Ratios 49:1 / 40:1 / 60:2 / 50:2 / 41:2
Oil filling L ca. 20
Backlash ° 0,021 - 0,05
Weight kg 1250
Type DTE / DTL / 1LA6
handwheel D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational Brake
Type W263C
Traction Sheave kproj. = see product catalog
Type Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 540 640 700 740 800
Rim width mm 160 160 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8 x 10/11
(z x d) 7x13 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13
6x16 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16
5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18
Weight (incl. hub) kg 125 150 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten

W-Drives W-Drives
W332C W332C
The well proven for big loads

Gears
Gears
• VVVF-motor (16 up to 75 kW) controlled accurately
• Horizontal rope departure (SA1) PERFORMANCE DATA
• Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction
2800 0,63 - 1,6 1:1
sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
3200 0,63 - 1,2 1:1

W332C
• Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake
W332C horizontal left
• Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm
horizontal right
Technical Data
Gear type W332C
Ratios 63:1 / 47:1 / 59:2 / 46:2 / 57:3
Oil filling L ca. 33
Backlash ° 0,022 - 0,04
Weight kg 1700
Motor frequency controlled
Type DTE / DTL / 1LA6
handwheel D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos kproj. = see product catalog
Operational Brake
Type W332C
Traction Sheave
Type Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 640 700 740 800
Rim width mm 160 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8 x 10/11
(z x d) 7x13 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13
6x16 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16
5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18
Weight (incl. hub) kg 150 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265

Gearmotors Gearmotors
Elevator motors Elevator motor for TW45C

General description
Description of the motors

Gears
Gears
All motors are constructed as three-phase current squirrel-cage motors and have either an internal ventilator on the motor shaft
or forced ventilation. The motors with type of protection IP 21 are internally cooled, whereas the motors with the increase type of
protection IP 55 are externally cooled.
The frequency-controlled types (V3F) are designed as 4-pole motors. 4/16-pole versions of the motors are used for pole-changing
operation (AC2). For the voltage-controlled version (ACVV), which are also 4/16-pole, the 16-pole winding by means of direct
current braking is used for the speed controller.
The motors are configured for thermal class F, but are only used up to thermal class B.
Motor CEG MT132S for Machine TW45C
Inspection of the motor temperature takes place via two and/or three flush mounted PTC thermistors in the motor winding.
The mechanical power transmission of the motor to the gear takes place by means of a flexible coupling (the coupling is a constitu-
ent part of the gear).
In emergency situations, the handwinding wheel on the motor can be used to turn the drive by hand after manual release of the Standard motors
operational and emergency brake. This enables the elevator car to be move to a landing to rescue trapped persons in the event of
Name Unit Technical data
failure of the power supply.
Manufacturer EME (CEG)
All motors are equipped with roller bearings. Type MT132STD 20197S MT132STD 20193S
Motor type designation TKAW C 5.2 400 C 7.0 400
Voltage/frequency [V/Hz] 340/42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S5-operation data 180 c/h / 50% ED
Item Designation Item Designation Speed range [1/min] 1000 - 1249 1250 - 1800 1000 - 1249 1250 - 1800
1 Coupling hub 2 Motor flange
Performance [kW] 4.2 - 5.2 5.2 5.6 - 7.0 7.0
Torque [Nm] 40 40 - 28 54 54 - 37
3 Load securing device 4 Terminal box
Rated current [A] 12.5 16.5
5 Connection for encoder 6 Cable gland for terminal box Allowed starting torque [Nm] 70 63 88 79
7 Encoder 8 Handwinding wheel Allowed starting current [A] 20 25
Components of the elevator motors (DTE140 as an example) Effective power [V] 340 340
Cos Ø 0.87 0.88
Efficiency 0.82 0.82
Structural shape IMB5/V1
Type of protection IP54
Ventilation internal ventilator
Handwinding wheel1) [mm] D270 (plastic)
Kproj. [mm] 483
Site conditions Weight [kg] 50 60
Real value generator (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
The following application conditions apply to all motors:
WDG100-38-1024 HTL /
Real value generator (special)
• Maximum altitude: 1000 m amsl WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
• Max. 40° C ambient temperature at max. 50% air humidity. The minimum ambient temperature
1) optional without handwinding wheel for location of machine in headroom/pit
should not fall below +5° C. Cf. also EN 81.
• Max. rel. air humidity 90% at 20° C (without dewfall)
If the site altitude of the motor is exceeded, the power outputs of the motors are to be reduced.
If the maximum temperature is exceeded, the power outputs of the motors are to be reduced (cf. derating according to VDE 0530).
An increase in power output even with reduced requirements is not possible!

Elevator motor for TW63B Elevator motor for TW130

Gears
Gears
Motor CEG MT132S für Maschine TW63B
Motor Siemens 1LG4 for TW130
Standardised motors for V3F (frequency-controlled) Standard motors

Name Technical data Name Unit Technical data
Version frequency-controlled (VVVF) frequency-controlled
Solution
Manufacturer EME (CEG) Motorlift (VVVF)
MT132STD MT132STD MT132STD ThyssenKrupp Siemens
Type CMRF160L1 Manufacturer
20705S 22557S 22164S Aufzugswerke Motorlift
Motor version C 5.2 400 C 7.0 400 C 10.0 330 ML 13.0 400 1LA6 166-4AA-11Z
name TKAW TW63 00 TW63 00 TW63 00 TW63 00 1LA6 186-4AA-11Z
S5-operation data 180 c/h / 50% ED Type DTE132 - DTL180
1LG4 220-4AA-31Z
1000 - 1250 - 1000 - 1250 - 1000 - 1250 - 1000 - 1250 - CMRF160
Speed range [1/min]
1249 1800 1249 1800 1249 1650 1249 1650 Voltage / frequency V / Hz see Product catalogue „Elevator motors“
Performance range [kW] 4.2 - 5.2 5.2 5.6 - 7.0 7.0 8.0 - 10.0 10.0 10.5 - 13.0 13.0 S5 - operation data 240 c/h / 50% ED
Torque range [Nm] 40 40 - 28 54 54 - 37 77 77 - 58 100 100 - 75 Speed range rpm 1250 - 1650 1250 - 1500
Rated current [A] 12.5 16.5 28 32 Nominal power kW 11 - 42 13 - 33.5
Allowed starting torque [Nm] 70 63 88 79 125 170 Structural shape IMB5/V1
Allowed starting current [A] 20 25 44 48 System of protection IP21 IP54/55
Effectiv power [V] 340 340 290 340 Ventilation Internal ventilator2)
Cos Ø 0.87 0.88 0.84 0.82 D2703) / 360 D2701) / D360
Efficiency 0.82 0.82 0.85 0.85 Handwinding mm
(plastic) (plastic)
Structural shape BV6530-06/Bl.1 2)
Kproj. mm see Product catalogue „Elevator motors“
Type of protection IP55 IP54 Real value generator (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
Ventilation Internal ventilator WDG100-38-1024 HTL
handwinding wheel 1) [mm] D270 (plastic) Real value generator (special)
Kproj. [mm] 539 2)
577 2) 639 2) 1) only for type 1LA6 166 and CMRF160
Weight [kg] 56 62 70 TBD 2) type DTL180 with forced ventilation
Real value generator (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL 3) only for type DTE132
Real value generator (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus

Special motors
1) optional without handwinding wheel for location of machine in headroom / pit
For areas of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order type IMB5/V1 motor
2) motor with integrated special flange and enhanced motor terminal box for intermediate clamping of the brake magnets
is used.
On inquiry also pole changing motors are possible.

Elevator motor for TW160 Elevator motor for W-Drives

Gears
Gears
Motor Siemens 1LG4 for TW160
Motor Siemens 1LG4 for W263C and W332C
Standard motors Standard motors

Name Unit Technical data Designation Unit Technical data
Solution Phase shift controlled (ACVV) Frequency-controlled (VVVF) Solution frequency-controlled (V3F)
ThyssenKrupp ThyssenKrupp Elevator Siemens
Manufacturer Siemens Siemens Manufacturer
Aufzugswerke DTE DTL DTE 1LA6 ...
1LA6 166-4AA-11Z Type 140 S/L 180 S/M 180 M 180S 252 - 283
Type LNLA 180 - 250 DTE132 - DTL180 1LG4 186-4AA-11Z Factory standard 65 310 12 00 0 65 310 15 00 0
1LG4 220-4AA-31Z Voltage / frequency V / Hz See factory standard
Voltage / frequency V/Hz 400 / 50 4) S5 - operation data 240 c/h / 50% ED
S5 - operation data 180 c/h / 40% ED 240 c/h / 50% ED Speed range rpm 1250 - 1650 800 - 1050 1250 - 1500
Speed range rpm 1270 - 1350 1250 - 1650 1250 - 1500 Rated output kW 16 - 20 27 / 33 37 / 42 185 48 / 75
Rated output kW 19 - 35 11 - 42 13 - 33.5 Structural shape IMB5
Structural shape B9 IMB5 System of protection IP23 IP55
System of protection IP21 IP55 Forced
Ventilation Internal ventilator Internal ventilator
Ventilation Forced ventilation Internal ventilator2) ventilation
D360 D2703) / 360 D360 Handwinding wheel mm D360 (plastic)
Handwinding wheel mm
(plastic) (plastic) (plastic) Kproj. mm See factory standard
Kproj. mm See factory standard 4) Real value generator (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
Real value generator (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL Real value generator (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
2x64 WDG100-38-1024 HTL
Real value generator (special) Special motors
1) version depends on project specs. For ranges of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order B9 or IMB5 type motor
2) type DTL180 with forced ventilation is used.
3) only for type DTE132
4) see product catalogue elevator motors
Special motors
For ranges of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order type B9 or IMB5 motor
is used.

Drum Drives Drum Drives

Gears
Gears
In shafts with cramped space a drum drive is an alternative to a traction shea- The illustration shows the design for a drum with 2:1 suspension.
ve lift with counterweight or hydraulic lift. In this case the lift is suspended on
two ropes, coiled on a drum. Depending on the length of drum required, the
installation can be carried out in an overhanging arrangement, comparable Calculation tool rope drum
to traction sheave installation. In designs with outer bearing, the drive must
be attached to two double T-profiles according to the SA9 design to bring
the statically indeterminate three-point bearing back to a two-point bearing. Travel height 13,47 [m] Car weight 1450 [Kg]
Drum drives can be used for the modernisation of existing drum drives Ø-drum 400 [mm] Rated load 1000 [Kg]
and new lifts, where, due to the space available (shaft floor space), no lift Ø-rope 10 [mm] Rope strength 72,7 [kN]
with counterweight or hydraulic jack can be employed. The installation is
frequently planned in existing stairwells that are to be used as part of a Drum drive TW130 without Suspension 2 : 1 Rope safety 12,1
outer bearing
building renovation to enable the comfort requirements of the customer
8 [mm] 46,7 [kN]
regarding the building to be realised. outer pillow block n [y/n]
9 [mm] 58,9 [kN]
Drum drive
The rope breaking force with only two cables limits the possible load of TW63B with outer bearing Drako H250 10 [mm] 72,7 [kN]
Length (parallel) 551 [mm]
cage mass and load capacity, and define the required rope diameter. The Rope strength 11 [mm] 86,0 [kN]
defined in EN81-20 requirements for drum drives are defined as follows: 12 [mm] 104,8 [kN]
Length (centered) X 581 [mm]
13 [mm] 126,0 [kN]
Requirements of the standard EN81-20: The table shows model designs with reference to 12 m conveyance height. In the event of queries the design must be realised on
• Minimum 2 cables, which are wound one layer the basis of customer data.
• D/d (Drum/Rope): ≥ 40
• Rope diameter: ≥ 8 mm Technical Data
• Rope safety: ≥ 12 Rated load max. Q [kg] 450 525 800 800 1000 1000 1200
• Speed max. 0,63 m/s Car weight max. F [kg] 300 400 550 550 700 700 800
Total load F+Q [kg] 750 925 1350 1350 1700 1700 2000
Rated speed v [m/s] 0,5 0,63 0,5 0,63 0,5 0,63 0,63
The UCM requirement can either be realised with an NBS system or a safety catch. Suspension 1:1
Coiling of both ropes can be achieved either in parallel or from the outside to the centre. Given the axis load, coiling from the outsi- Travel height max. [m] 12
de to the centre is preferable. Machine type TW63B TW130 TW160
Ratio 48:1 33:1 42:1 35:1 50:1 41:1 35:1
Drum -Ø [mm] 360 360 450 450 520 520 520
Drum length [mm] 240 265 300 300 300 300 300
Number of ropes 2
Rope -Ø [mm] (Drako 250 H) 8 9 10 11 11 12 13
Dissipated heat [kJ/h] 1850 2615 3185 4183 4232 5483 6623
Motor output [kW] 6,5 9,3 11,8 14,5 14,7 18,1 22,2
Motor current [A] 14,4 25,5 26,8 44,5 46,0 41,2 52,4
For higher loads the W-series is available on request.
Our whole range of options, for example emergency brake system (NBS), Ex-protection or vertical motors is available for you. If you
cannot find the suitable machine in the matrix above, please contact us, together we will find a solution for higher loads or special
applications.
Rope coiling centrally coiled Rope coiling coiled in parallel


Possible uses and solution version Possible uses and solution version
Based on the shaft loading, it is since the regenerative braking unit is

Technical Report - Drum Drives

Drum drives – possible to define whether a drum integrated in the inverter without
with overhanging arrangement additional hardware costs. All
Possible uses and solution versions (Figure 4) is viable or whether the regulatory standard requirements for
drum has to be designed with outer regenerative braking have been met.
Volker Lenzner1), Frank Eßer2)
bearings (Figures 6 and 7).
Since drum lifts have to meet the
In the case of a layout with outer requirements based on EN81-1 (see
Apart from the standard lift drive lifts or in modernisation, when the car
bearings, the statically indeterminate 9.11) or of EN81-20 (5.6.7), the
concepts with traction sheave floor area is reduced by retrofitting of
triple bearing must be led back via subject of UCM (A3) also has to be
drives with counterweight balance car separation doors and automatic
the hinged column below the drive to considered. There are two possible
or hydraulics, there is another landing doors.
a double bearing. solutions for this: the first is a design
drive concept with geared unit and
Against the background of Since with increasing gross weight with an emergency braking system
rope drum.
demographic change, growing and greater traction sheave (NBS) on the geared drive if the
In the case of the drum drive, the lift
requirements for handicapped diameter, the drive power required space available in the geared drive
car is suspended on the rope and the
friendly accessibility of buildings and of the geared drive increases as Figure 6: Geared unit TW130 with drum and
layout permits this. The other solution
drive machine coils up the rope
comfort requirements, it may be does the size of the geared drive, traction sheave with outer bearing on frame is to realise the UCM case via a
attached to the drum, in a manner Figure 3: Rope end attachment
technically necessary to realise a lift the potential installation situation safety catch acting on both sides.
similar to a crane, on the drum  D/d (drum diameter to rope
solution in an existing stairwell with must be examined to determine Since the lift can only leave the stop
(Figures 4 to 6). Due to the torque
cramped space. In this case a lift with diameter) greater than 40 downwards due to load conditions,
needed, worm gear is preferred as
drum drive makes sense. Minimum rope diameter 8 mm only a potential electrical fault needs
drives with corresponding adjustment to be considered for the upwards
for attachment of the drum. This lift Rope safety greater than 12
direction when leaving the stop. The
system dispenses with a In terms of regulatory standards,  max. speed of lift 0.63 m/s
both EN 81-1 (see 9.2.2., 9.2.3.2, 9.4 electrical power must undergo a
counterweight to enable the entire three-phase shutdown when passing
and 10.3.2) as well as EN 81-20 (see  No restriction regarding the type of
shaft cross-section to be used for the the final stops to ensure safe
5.5.2.2, 5.5.4) make the following suspension (1:1 or 2:1)
car. This lift concept is also suitable stopping of the lift car via limit
for replacing existing hydraulic lifts. demands on the use of drum drives:
Since the mass of the car and the switches according to EN81-1 (see
These systems are used as  Minimum number of two ropes, load-bearing capacity are suspended 10.5.2.2. and 10.5.3.1) and EN 81-20
Figure 7: Geared unit TW63horizontal with
replacement drives for pre-existing coiled in a single layer without balancing mass on both drum and traction sheave with outer bearing (5. 8. 1. 2 and 5. 12. 2).
ropes, the rope-breaking force must on frame
be considered in reference to the Figure 4: Geared drive TW130 horizontal with whether the often cramped space is Market situation
total mass. Through the use of ropes drum and overhanging traction sheave
sufficient. While the drum drive used to be
with high breaking force (e.g. Drako
If necessary, guidance of the rope very much a niche product, the
250h or equivalent) and a low lift car
can be realised via a guided diverted demand and project situation has
mass, a good economic solution can
pulley, depending on the site altered greatly in recent years. To
be found here too.
circumstances. Compensation of the cope with this situation the two
different rope extension of both ropes
Drive design
must be achieved via attachment to a
The rope diameter required and the “rocker.”
resulting minimum drum diameter are
derived from the information of load- To operate lifts with drum drives
bearing capacity (Q) and lift car mass especially economically, use of a
(F). The rope safety also has to be frequency inverter with regenerative
Figure 1: Example for a rope test and determination of drum length. checked (Figure 1). braking is advisable. Measurements
on lifts have shown that the share of
The length of the rope drum required regenerative braking can amount to
depends on the conveyance height, 60 to 70%. This means that as a
the type of suspension and coiling result of regenerative braking, a lift
direction of both ropes (Figure 2). system of comparable effectiveness
Coiling from the outside inwards with a traction sheave lift with 50%
(groove in the middle) is preferable counterweight compensation can be
due to the axis load, since the load achieved in terms of energy
centre is always the same. efficiency.
The MFR inverter (Figure 5) with

1) LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components Figure 5: MFR frequency inverter with integrated regenerative braking of Figure 8: Geared unit TW130 V with drum
Figure 2: Rope coiling (centrally coiled or coiled in parallel) 2) Rudolf Fuka GmbH integrated regenerative braking LiftEquip is a very economical below with outer bearing and diverter pulley
on frame
solution here,
22 German edition: LIFT-REPORT 42. Jahrg. (2016) Heft 1 German edition: LIFT-REPORT 42. Jahrg. (2016) Heft 1 23

Drum Drives Emergency Brake System NBS
Technical Report EN 81- Emergency Brake System NBS

Possible uses and solution version 20/ -50
-conform
companies FUKA and LiftEquip have Summary Consequently this drive concept is
Gears
developed a joint concept. An altered not only an option as a replacement
Lifts with a drum drive are a special Space saving, simple, cost-
load population was considered in solution for existing drum drives, it
solution that not only represent a good
this regard for the calculation of the can also be used in retrofitting of a effective
technical solution, especially for
worm drive and defined as an overall new lift or as replacement for a
concept by a standardisation of the
installations in cramped spaces, but
hydraulic lift. The use of regenerative Certified and type approved
are also economical. The regulatory
drums (diameter and length of the
standard requirements from EN81-1
frequency inverters – MFR with
according to EN 81-20/-50
blanks). Together with the integrated regeneration – is advisable
have not been changed in EN81-20;
production facilities for corresponding in combination with a drum drive,
allowance must be made for the UCM
machine frames, in particular for since up to 50% of the energy can be
aspect.
designs with outer bearings from saved through regenerative braking,
Fuka, a wide range of solutions can Different arrangements of the drive depending on the lift constellation.
now also be offered here and requirements for the rope coiling
economically (Figure 8). can be realised on a project-related
basis.
Control unit We provide you with a well thought out and calculated
(mounting on machine room wall or
Control System package of solutions: Machine with emergency brake,
in control cabinet)
overspeed governor including a switch for overspeed and
a separate control-unit. Together, those components form
a closed and operable system. This systemic solution
spares you time consuming self-made constructions bea-
ring unforeseeable costs.
Compact Design
Our emergency brake is mounted on the drive shaft
vis-à-vis the traction sheave: A configuration, which
offers you a space saving solution.
Easy Conversion
To modernize your lift installation the addition of the fol-
lowing components to the drive suffices: an additional
Additional switch at
safety switch at the overspeed governor and a separate
overspeed governor control unit with a voltage supply for wall-mounted in-
stallation in the machine room.
Terminal box for intermediate control
-Brake port
-Ventilation monitoring Continuous Availability
-Temperature monitoring
The emergency brake system is optionally available for
Emergency Brake NBS the following geared drives:
TW 45C, TW63B, TW130, TW160.
Motor
Braking device against overspeed according to EN 81-
20 /5.6.6 and against unintentional movement of the car
according EN 81-20 /5.6.7.
Technical Data
Machine Rated Load Q [kg]* Suspension r Brake Torque [Nm]
TW 45C 500 / 1000 1:1 / 2:1 1200
TW 63B 1125 / 2100 1:1 / 2:1 2200
TW 130 1800 / 3500 1:1 / 2:1 4000
24 German edition: LIFT-REPORT 42. Jahrg. (2016) Heft 1
TW 160 2200 / 4750 1:1 / 2:1 5500
* maximum values depending on speed v

Mini-Gearless
Own Notes PMC- / DAF-Series
Gearless
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ PMC - DAF Product Description 60

Performance Matrix 61
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC125 S / M / L 62
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ PMC145-2 S/XS 63
PMC145-2 M/XM 64
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ PMC145-2 L/XL 65
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ PMC170 S - XL 67
DAF210 M / L 68
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ DAF270 S / M / L / XL 70
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Machine Base Frame for PMC - Gearless 74
Machine Base Frame for DAF - Gearless 75
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Modernisation solution 'Geard to Gearless' 76
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Colouring for all Drives 100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Mini-Gearless Mini-Gearless
PMC - DAF EN 81-

20/ -50
Performance Matrix
Gearless
Gearless
Range of synchronous gearless machines for MRL application
Efficient a manual venting lever is possible. smooth running drive for your lift.
suspension 2:1
Another option of the PMC series is a
With our synchronous gearless m/s 1,00 1,50 1,60 1,75 2,00 2,50 3,00 3,50
handwheel extension. Compact
series (PMC and DAF) one of the ft/min 200 350 500 700
most compact drives is available The compact design is a significant
Complete kg lbs
for deployment in energy efficient advantage for using the drives in
320 PMC...S PMC145XS PMC
modernisation / or system solutions, We can provide you with the matc- your systems.
450 1451)/1252) 145XL
ideally suited for energy recovery. hing frequency inverter (MFR: with
integrated power regeneration; MFC: Reliable
480 PMC...M PMC145XM / DAF
These series stand out as excellent
630 1451)/1252) 80m 210M DAF DAF270M
value for money. Excellent ef- with braking resistor) in each case Durable, sturdy construction, pro-
908 2000 PMC…L PMC145XL DAF 270S
ficiencies with low energy consump- for our gearless drives, which feature mising exceptionally long service
all of the drive parameters required. 1000 1451)/1253) 80m 210L
tion. life and availability and sustainable
1050 PMC170S
In this way we guarantee fast, safe economic efficiency.
Safe start-up. Optionally in plug&play 1135 2500 DAF210L
version with integrated brake control, EN 81-20/-50 1150
A safety brake is used in all gearless
line filter, line inductor and contac- Our drives meet all requirements with 1250 PMC PMC PMC 135m 100m
drives available from LiftEquip, which
tors. regard to the above standards, in par- 1350 170M 170L 170XL
is licensed as type-tested safety bra-
In addition, we provide various ticular the approval of safety brakes 1362 3000
ke against excessive speed upwards
in accordance with EN 81-20/-50.
machine frames, perfectly adapted and the rope guard. 1400
Rope guard acc. to EN 81-77 up to
to these drives. Special designs are 1590 3500
earthquake category 3.
available on request. 1600 100m
1650 45m 80m 80m
Flexible
Smooth running 1700
The traction sheaves we use are 1800 DAF
The drives can be used both in the
shaft (MRL) as well as in the machi-
precisely manufactured and supplied 1816 4000 270M DAF270L
ne room. The arrangement can be
with hardened grooves. As a result 1900
configured in 1:1 and 2:1 suspension.
we guarantee you a long service 2000
A design version of the brake with
life, low vibrations and an extremely 2042 4500
2200
2250
2270 5000
2400
2500
Travel height
Travel heightdatadata
can vary
candepending on car weight
vary depending onetc.
carA weight
check with the A
etc. TLD is necessary.
check with the TLD is necessary.
1) PMC145 is designed for 240 Starts/h
2) PMC125S/M are designed for 120 Starts/h
Notice: 1) PMC145 is designed for 240 Starts/h
3) PMC125L is designed for 180 Starts/h
2) PMC125S/M are designed for 120 Starts/h

3) PMC125L is designed for 180 Starts/h 28.08.2017

PMC125 S / M / L* EN 81- EN 81- PMC145-2 S/XS

20/ -50-conform
20/ -50-conform
Gearless
Gearless
PMC125S PMC125M
PMC125L*
PMC145-2S PMC145-2XS
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC125S001 PMC125M002 PMC125L003*
Suspension r 2:1 1:1 2:1 Technical Data
Rated Load Q [kg] 450 / 480 480 630 500 750 800 1000 Type of machine PMC145-2S PMC145-2XS
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 Suspension r 1:1 2:1
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 240 320 240 240 320 240 Rated Load Q [kg] 275 450
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 6 / 6,5 6 / 6,5 8 6 / 6,5 6 / 6,5 6 / 6,5 8 6 / 6,5 Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6
Number of Grooves max. 1) z 4 5 4 6 10 7 6 10 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 240
Groove type seat / vee groove, hardened Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 6
Rated Power PN [kW] 2,8 2,9 3,8 2,9 4,4 4,7 5,9 Number of Grooves max. z 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 170 230 350 350 280 350 Groove type seat / vee groove, hardened
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 13 14 25 Rated Power PN [kW] 1,59 2,8 4,4
Weight [kg] 127 150 137 204 193 Rated Torque MN [Nm] 190 170 165
Number of Switching Operations 120 180 Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 14 15
Duty Cycle % 40 50 Weight [kg] 132 158
Rated Current IN [A] 7,9 10,2 14,6 14,9 11,9 14,9 Number of Switching Operations 180
Output Factor cos φ 0,89 0,91 0,91 0,93 0,91 Duty Cycle % 50
Braking Torque [Nm] 2 x 210 2 x 300 2 x 500 Rated Current IN [A] 8,4 7,5 9,9
Designation 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits) Output Factor cos φ 0,92 0,91 0,96
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit Designation 2 x 250 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Protection Class IP 21 Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit
Noise level [dB(A)] < 60 Protection Class IP 21
MFR 5.5 7.5 MFR 5.5
Frequency inverter type Frequency inverter type
MFC 21-15, 31-10 21-15, 31-15 MFC 31-10 31-15
1)
with standardised groove clearance RA 12 mm for d=6/6,5 and 14 mm for d=8 mm * The machine PMC125L is likely to be available from the 4th quarter of 2017 onwards. Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC125 drive

PMC145-2 M/XM Produktkatalog

EN 81- Technik
EN 81- PMC145-2 L/XL
Antrieb PMC145-2® 20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
2.4.8 Treibscheibenseite für Treibscheibendurchmesser Produktkatalog

240mm, 210mm und 320mm Antrieb PMC145-2®
Gearless
Gearless
PMC145-L
PMC145-M
PMC145-2L PMC145-2XL PMC145-2L
PMC145-2M PMC145-2XM PMC145-2M
View from above

View from above
Sideview
Sideview
Bottom view
Technical Data Bottom view Abb. 2.4-9
Technical Data
Type of machine Pos. Bezeichnung
PMC145-2M Pos. Bezeichnung
PMC145-2XM Type of machine PMC145-2L PMC145-2XL
Suspension r 1:1 1 Ansicht von unten 2:1 2 Seitenansicht Suspension r 1:1Pos. Bezeichnung 2:1Pos. Bezeichnung
Rated Load Q [kg] 300 4003 480von oben
Ansicht 630 450 Rated Load Q [kg] 500 1 630 800unten
Ansicht von 10002 630
Seitenansicht
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,2 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 3 Ansicht
1,2 von oben 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 240 210 240 320 240 210 240 320 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 240 210 240 320 240 210 240 320
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 6 8 Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 6 8 6 8
Number of Grooves max. z 5 8/9 6 Number of Grooves max. z 6 10 / 11 / 13 6 10 / 11 / 13 6
Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power PN [kW] 1,79 2,38 2,72 2,86 3,1 3,91 3,9 6 6,9 5,5 Rated Power PN [kW] 2,76 3,69 4,2 4,42 4,7 6,01 6 9,4 10,2 8
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 285 245 235 205 225 236 220 Rated Torque MN [Nm] 440 375 360 315 352 350 320
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 18 19 Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 32 30
Weight [kg] 185 202 Weight [kg] 225 216 214 216 225 216 214 229 238
Number of Switching Operations ThyssenKrupp
180 Aufzugswerke 32240 Version 02/2015Number of Switching Operations 180
Duty Cycle % 50 Duty Cycle % 40 50
Rated Current IN [A] 11,5 9,9 9,5 8,3 14,8 15,6 13,9 Rated Current IN [A] 18,3 15,5 14,9 13 24,7 24,6 22,4
Output Factor cos φ 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,93 0,94 0,97 0,96 Output Factor cos φ 0,93 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,95 0,96
Version of Brake 2 x 350 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits) Version of Brake 2 x 550 Nm, 2-surface
ThyssenKrupp disc brake in double configuration
Aufzugswerke 33 (2 brake circuits) Version
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class IP 21 Protection Class IP 21
MFR 5.5 7.5 MFR 7.5 18
Frequency inverter type Frequency inverter type
MFC 21-15 / 31-15 MFC 21-15 / 31-15 21-32 / 31-26
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive

Mini-Gearless
Own Notes EN 81- PMC170 S - XL

20/ -50-conform
Gearless
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Dimensions
L (mm) D (mm) E (mm) F (mm) H (mm) S (mm) G (kg)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170S 180 613 426 300 706 273 381
PMC170M 240 673 486 360 766 304 423
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170L 270 703 516 390 796 319 448
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ PMC170XL 330 763 576 450 856 350 492
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Technical Data

Type of machine PMC170S PMC170M PMC170L PMC170XL
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Suspension r 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1050 1650
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Number of Grooves max. z 10
Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Rated Power PN [kW] 9,7 9,8 15,6 17,1 19,5
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 485 781
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 30 42 40 42
Weight [kg] 381 423 448 492
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Number of Switching Operations 180 240
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Duty Cycle % 50

Rated Current IN [A] 23 27 40 45
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Output Factor cos φ 0,95 0,94 0,95 0,94
Version of Brake 2 x 1200 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class IP 21
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MFR 18 --
Frequency inverter type
MFC 31-26 31-40 31-60
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC170 drive

DAF210M EN 81- EN 81- DAF210L

20/ -50 -conform
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
Technical Data Technical Data
Type of machine DAF210M Type of machine DAF210L
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 Suspension r 1:1 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 450 630 700 630 700 630 700 630 Rated Load Q [kg] 630 630/900/1000/1125 630/900/1000/1125 1125 1000
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 360 320 360 320 360 320 360 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 520/400/360/320 520/400/360/320 320 360
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 8/9 8 8/9 8 8/9 8 8/9 Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 8-13
Number of Grooves max. z 5 5/4 5 5/4 5 5/4 5 5/4 Number of Grooves max. z 7 5-8
Rated Power PN [kW] 2,83 4,3 4,2 4,7 6,8 7,3 7,2 7,9 8,0 Rated Power PN [kW] 4,10 5,75 4,7/5,9/6,6/6,5/7,5 7,4/9,5/10,5/11,5 11,3/12,4 12,5
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 450 430 378 380 382 365 370 360 Rated Torque MN [Nm] 650 575 610/590/586/520/600 600/595/590/575 580/565 563
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 33 (≤ 75 1/min) / 37 (> 75 1/min) Permitted radial Shaft Load for 320-, 360- and 400-traction sheave 38 (≤ 75 1/min) / 46 (> 75 1/min)
[kN]
Weight [kg] 250 for 520-traction sheave 37 (≤ 75 1/min) / 41 (> 75 1/min)
Number of Switching Opera- 240 180 240 Weight [kg] 320/325/330

tions Number of Switching Opera-
240
Duty Cycle % 50 60 50 tions
Rated Current IN [A] 12,5 12,0 10,5 16,1 16,2 17,4 15,4 17,2 Duty Cycle % 50
Output Factor cos φ 0,94 0,95 0,96 0,95 Rated Current IN [A] 16,0 14,0 15,4/15/15,2/13/16,8 23,4/23,2/23,0/25,5 25,7/25,1 25,0
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits) Output Factor cos φ 0,94 0,95 0,96/0,94/0,95 0,96/0,95/0,95 0,95/0,96 0,96
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuits
MFR 5.5 7.5
Frequency inverter type MFR 7.5 18
MFC 31-15 31-26 Frequency inverter type
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF210
MFC 31-15 31-26/40 31-40

DAF270S EN 81- EN 81- DAF270M

20/ -50 -conform
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
Type of machine DAF270S Type of machine DAF270M
Suspension r 2:1 Suspension r 1:1 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1250 Rated Load Q [kg] 900 800 1000 900 800 1000 1350 1600 2000 1350 1600 1350 1600 1150 1350 1600
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5 Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 320 440 320 520 320/440 520 440 520 440 520 440 520 440
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11
Number of Grooves max. z 10 Number of Grooves max. z 7-9
Rated Power PN [kW] 8 12,6 13,8 15 17,8 Rated Power PN [kW] 5,4/7,4 7,8/10,6 9 10,7 11,4 13 15,3/14,9 14,2 16,3/16,7 15,8 18,2 16,6 19,5 21,6
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 640 630 600 570
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1200/1175 1075/1050 1175 1175 1250 1050 1050/1025 1050 1025/1050 1025 1000 860 860 950
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 43,5
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 43,5/58
Weight incl. traction sheave [kg] 475
Weight incl. traction sheave [kg] 550/570
Number of Switching Operations [F/h] 240
Number of Switching
[%] 180 240 180 240 180 240 180
Duty Cycle 50 Operations
Rated Current IN [A] 23 30,7 29,2 27,8 Duty Cycle % 40 50 40 50 40 50
Output Factor cos φ 0,94 0,95 0,96 Rated Current IN [A] 27,5 24,5 24 25 22 30 24 24 25,5 30 30/35 30 35/30,5 35 38/29 32,7 41,5/28,5 31,4
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700 Nm Output Factor cos φ 0,96 0,94 0,92 0,93 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,95 0,95/0,94 0,95 0,96/0,95 0,96 0,95/0,96 0,96
Version of Brake
option: with manual release
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1250 / 2x1700 Nm
Version of Brake
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit option: with manual release
Protection Class IP20, optional IP54 Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit
MFR 18 -- Protection Class IP20, optional IP54
Frequency inverter type
MFC 31-26 31-40 21-50R MFR 18 --
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270 Frequency inverter type
MFC 31-26/40 31-26 31-40 31-48 31-60 21-50R

DAF270L EN 81- EN 81- DAF270XL

20/ -50 -conform
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
Option: with manual release

Type of machine DAF270L Type of machine DAF270XL
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 Suspension r 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1100/1000 2000/2250/2500 1900 2000 1900 1900 2200/2000 1700 1800/2000 Rated Load Q [kg] 1100/1000 1800/2000/2250/2500 2200 2000 4000/3400 4000
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 1,8 2,0 2,5 Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 1,0 1,6 2,0 2,5 1,0/1,6 1,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 490/440 520 490 520 520 440/490 520 490/440 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 520*/440 440
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11 8-12 Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11 8-13
Number of Grooves max. z 7 6-10 Number of Grooves max. z 7 6-10
Rated Power PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 11,7/12,8/14,6 18/20,4/23,3 1,8 20 19,4 21,2 24,6/22,5 25,1 26,5/30 Rated Power PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 12,2/12,8/14,6 17,3/20,4/23,3 24,6 30 22,5/30,5 25,1
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1433/1400/ 1375/1400/ 1400 1400 1400 1375 1350/1375 1300 1300/1325 Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1400/1600 1350 1325 1650/1400 1380
1600 1600 Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 73
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 58 Weight [kg] 770/780
Weight [kg] 730/740 Number of Switching Ope- 240 240/180 240 240/180 180
Number of Switching Operations 240 240/180 180 240 240/180 rations
Duty Cycle % 50 50/40 50 Duty Cycle % 50 50/40 50 50/40 40
Rated Current IN [A] 26/24,5 25/36/41/28 42,5/43,5/36/ 43,5 43,5 43,5 60 41,5/60/ 58 58/40/59 Rated Current IN [A] 26/24,5 36/41/28 43,5/36/50/41 41,5/60 59 42,5/51,5/62 56
50/41 35/60 Output Factor cos φ 0,96 0,96/0,95 0,96/0,94 0,96 0,93 0,96/0,94 0,96
Output Factor cos φ 0,96 0,96/0,95 0,96/0,94 0,95 0,96 Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x2200
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700 option: with manual release
option: with manual release Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit
Brake Monitoring 1 microswitch per brake circuit Protection Class IP20, optional IP54
Protection Class IP20, optional IP54 MFR --
MFR 18 18 / -- 18 -- Frequency inverter type
Frequency inverter type MFC 31-40 31-60 31-60 21-105
MFC 31-40 31-60 31-60 31-60 / 21-105 Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270

Machine base frame for PMC - Gearless Machine base frame for DAF - Gearless
Gearless
Gearless
ModKit MO61 S / E DAF210 on TW63B DAF270 on
ModKit MO61 D4
machine base frame machine base frame
Option: manual release
AS
L5
Mo 55 -
AS dKit M 765 m
L5 O m
Mo 55 - 1 61 S
dKit 20
MO 6 mm
61
E
For more information see description ModKit MO61S / E For more information see description ModKit MO61 D4

Frame ModKit MO 61 S* ModKit MO 61 E MODKit MO61 D4 Frame DAF210 on TW63 DAF270 on
machine base frame machine base frame
Machine PMC145-2 M, L PMC125 M, L PMC145-2 M, L, XL
PMC145-2 M, L Machine DAF210M DAF210L DAF270S/M/L
Suspension r 1:1 2.1 Suspension r 1:1
Rated load Q [kg] up to 675 bis 630 up to 630 up to 1000 ASL-dimension flexible* [mm] 481 - 1073 501 - 1097 515 - 1265
Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0 up to 1,6 Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 320 / 360 360 / 400 320 / 440 / 520
Rope departure at drive [mm] from 555 to 765 from 595 to 1206 600 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400 Diameter of ropes d [mm] 8 / 10 8 / 10 / 11
flexible Vibration isolation elements Yes
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 210 / 240 240 Adapter plat Yes depending on the traction sheave
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 / 6,5 6 / 6,5 / 8 6 / 6,5 diameter
Number of ropes max. 12 Rope guard optional Yes
Number of grooves max. z 12 Manual release optional Yes
Type of groove seat / vee groove, hardened * ASL-dimension is dependent on the traction sheave
Pulley diameter DT [mm] 240 150 / 240 240
Vibration isolation elements Yes
Integrated rope end fastening points, No (1:1) Yes
rope anchorages Further special frames on request. Contact us!
Manual release, optional Yes
Hoist No Yes
* ▶ Pre-assemble machine base frame on stock
▶ Machine available from stock

Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless" Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless"

Example with DAF210L
Rope departure in downward direction:

Gearless
Gearless
DAF210 DAF270
Rope departure in upward direction:
A flexible solution, adjustable to the specific situation of the machine room
Existing situation Possible solution
Szenario 1
Geared drive with extended shaft (SA9), A gearless drive is installed in the al- Advantages of this example:
Traction sheave located in the lift shaft ready existing opening. The machine
frame is especially designed to provi- • Energy-efficient Gearless Technology
and machine room located beside the • No additional safety gears required as the brake of the machine
lift shaft. de support upwards and downwards.
is certified for the overspeed in upward direction
• no replacement of the rope pulleys in the lift shaft required
Szenario 2
Geared drive is mounted below the lift The gearless machine frame is es-
shaft, the machine room is located pecially designed for rope departure
Usage parameters:
under the lift shaft, rope departure in in upward direction. A support with
upward direction. isolations is included. Q ≤ 630 kg / 2:1 / 1,0 m/s / diameter = 520 mm / 13 mm ropes
Szenario 3
Geared drive is mounted above the lift The gearless machine frame is
shaft, the machine room is located abo- especially designed for a rope
vethe lift shaft, rope departure in down- departure in downward direction. A
ward direction. support with isolations is included.

ModKit
Own Notes MO61

Solutions with PMC Gearless
Gearless
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
AS
L5
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 55
- 76
5m
m
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MO61 D4
• Product description 80
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Techn. specifications 82
Rope suspension 1:1, 2:1
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Scope of supply 84
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MO61 S
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • Technical Data 85
• Dimensions 86
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MO61 E
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • Technical Data 87
• Dimensions 88
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MO61 CRX
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • The solution for plastic-coated ropes 89
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Colouring for all Drives 100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

ModKit ModKit
MO61 D4 MO61 D4
Product Description Product Description
The powerful system solution in the modernisation of installations Powerful and compact particu-larly favourable conditions for long-
Gearless
Gearless
Exclusively the modern, tried-and-tested life design are therefore satisfied.
up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s (1:1) or up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s (2:1). synchronous gearless drives of the
PMC145-2 and PMC170 series are used in The PMC gearless drives have a type-
the ModKit MO61. approved safety brake. This eliminates the
need during modernisation for additional
Safety Sustainability Scope of supply The low-noise and low-vibration drives op- measures, e.g. retrofits on the elevator car
erate at air-borne noise levels of less than or a rope brake.
Type-approved safety brake Small quantities of lubricants used and Gearless drive:
60 dB(A). The efficiency levels extend up to
EN 81-20/-50 compliant no oil change required Gearless PMC145-2
Gearless PMC145-2 92% and are therefore particularly efficient Braking device against overspeed accor-
Integrated device for pulling out of the Rolling bearings, life-time lubrication Machine base frame with elements for
in both driving and generator operation ding to EN 81-20 /5.6.6 and against unin-
safety gear (optional) vibration isolation
with energy recovery. The PMC drives are tentional movement of the car according EN
Innovation Additionally for 2:1: integrated rope
designed for 180 trips per hour with a duty 81-20 /5.6.7.
Efficiency Well-conceived, flexible solution with suspension and universal diverter pulley
cycle of 50% and can therefore easily cope
High level of efficiency of up to 92% integrated deflecting pulleys, rope fixing mounting for car and counterweight
with high traffic volumes.
provides for low energy consumption points and mountings on elevator car / Protective covers on traction sheave and
Ideally suited for energy recovery counterweight diverter pulleys in acc. with EN 81-20
The traction sheaves have a diameter of
Drives optimally matched to the lower to inclusive
240 mm with wearresistant, hardened seat
Comfort middle power segment
grooves. Ropes with diameters of 6 mm are
Minimal noises and very smooth running Ideal for use in modernisation in ex- Reliability
used. The ratio between traction sheave
Outstanding ride comfort, e.g. in com- change for a geared drive in the machine All installed components and parts are
diameter and rope diameter is thus always
bination with a matched frequency in- room, general without structural adapta- high quality
40. In accordance with the standards the
verter from LiftEquip tions Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare
parts availability
IAvailable in versions for 1:1 or 2:1 rope suspension:
Increase your installation's energy

efficiency with the ModKit MO61
As a rule the previous ceiling openings can
be used to feed through the ropes with the
machine base frame that can be individual-
ly adapted to the existing project planning.
This avoids costly structural measures.
High energy efficiency
Suspension 1:1 Suspension 2:1

The perfect combination: The frequency inverters from LiftEquip are
MFC and MFR frequency inverters specially designed for the strict re-quire-
Available in left- or right-hand version:: The ModKit MO61 is rounded off if required ments in elevator construction. The high
by a compact, optimally matched MFC clock frequency and control quality ensure
series frequency inverter in which all the a high degree of smooth running of the
drive parameters of the gearless drive are drive and low noise development.
already stored.
If required, you can operate the drive with

an MFR series frequency inverter with
integrated energy recovery unit. When the
drive is in generator operation, electrical
energy is fed back to the in-house system
and additionally increases the efficiency of
your installation.
MFR frequency inverter,
Left-hand version Right-hand version Webcode 2069from the wide product range

ModKit ModKit
MO61 D4 Technical specifications – Rope suspension 1:1 MO61 D4, Technical specifications – Rope suspension 2:1
with PMC145-2 with PMC145-2
Gearless
Gearless
Rope suspension 1:1 Rope suspension 2:1
Openings and load points P in the machine room Rope progression

(wrap angle on example with RCD =1400) (wrap angle on example with RCD = 1250)
Openings and load points in the machine room Rope progression
Centre of counterweight Centre of elevator

car frame Centre of counterweight Centre of elevator
car frame
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 1:1)
Nominal load max Q [kg] 320 450 630 Performance chart (rope suspension 2:1)
Nominal speed v [ms] 0.6 - 1.0 0.6 - 1.0 1.6 0.6 - 1.0 Q [kg] 630 1000
Nominal load max
Drive, gearless PMC 145-2M 145-2L 145-2XL 145-2L
Nominal speed v [mm] 0.6 - 1.0 1.05 - 1.6 0.6 - 1.0 1.05 - 1.6
Rope suspension r 1:1
Drive, gearless PMC - 145-2M 145-2XM 145-2L 145-2XL
Travel height*. FH [m] 33 25
Rope suspension r 2:1
Car weight min./max. FK [m] 300 - 650 400 - 900 650 - 900
Travel height* FH [m] 33
Rope clearance dimension SAM [mm] 600 - 1400
Car weight min./max. FK [m] 600 - 1200 870 - 1450
Diameter, traction sheave DT [mm] 240
Rope clearance dimension SAM [mm] 750 - 1250
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 8x6 12 x 6
Diameter, traction sheave DT [mm] 240
Diameter, diverter pulleys DA [mm] 240
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 9x6 12 x 6
Weight, drive mA [kg] 172 216 229 216
Diameter, diverter pulleys DA [mm] 240
Weight, sling mR [kg] max. 150
Weight, drive mA [kg] 172 189 216 229
*approximate value
Weight, sling mR [kg] max. 150
*approximate value

ModKit ModKit
MO61 D4 MO61 S
Scope of Supply Technical Data
We supply a flexible modification set, consisting of the components

Gearless
Gearless
Permanent-magnet, gearless synchronous machine:
Gearless PMC 145-2
Machine base frame with vibration isolation elements, in acc. with VDI 2566
- for rope suspension 1:1
- for rope suspension 2:1, integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages
- Machine base frames are individually manufactured to the desired rope clearance
dimension RCD
- Both versions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the left- or right-hand version
Integrated plastic rope deflecting pulleys
Variant for rope suspension 1:1:
- Optional: Universal, highly flexible mounting with rope fixing points for car and counter Option: manual release
weight
Variant for rope suspension 2:1:
- Universal, highly flexible mounting with diverter pulleys for car and counterweight
- Complete rope kit: suspension ropes with dia. 6 mm, expert's report, conformity-tested Integrated device for pulling the car out of the safety
with Directive 2014/33/EU “Lifts / Elevator Directive”, all rope accessories gear (optional)
Optional:
- Device for pulling the car out of the safety gear
- Optimally matched MFC or MFR series frequency inverter
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
Technical Data
Type of Machine PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L
Suspension r 1:1
Rated load Q [kg] up to 675
Diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0
(suspension 2:1)
Rope departure at drive flexible ASL [mm] from 555 to 765
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 210 / 240
Universal diverter pulley mounting Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 / 6,5 *
The pulley supports are fixed to the top beam of the elevator car sling and to the counter-
Groove clearance RA [mm] 10
weight. The freely rotatable suspension enables the diverter pulley to be mounted to match
the rope suspension so that the ropes are not subjected to twisting. Number of ropes max. 12
Number of grooves max. z 12
Mounting on car sling, Type of groove seat / v-groove
variable adaptation dep. No. of switching operations 180
on mounting profiles
Duty cycle ED % 40
Version of brake 2-surface disc brake (safety brake)
option: with manual release
Mounting on counterweight, Brake monitoring with microswitch
variable adaptation dep. Protection class IP 21
on frame profiles
Pulley diameter DT [mm] 240
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
▶ Pre-assembled machine frame on stock

ModKit ModKit
MO61 S MO61 E
Dimensions Technical data
Gearless
Gearless
max.
1
1064 mm
y = 461 mm
Option: manual release
2
AS
L5
95
555 ≤ ASL ≤ 765 (TS 240 mm) - 12
06
540 ≤ ASL ≤ 750 (TS 210 mm) mm
3
4
Technical Data
Type of Machine PMC125 M, PMC125 L, PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L
Suspension r 1:1
Rated load Q [kg] up to 630
Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0
External dimension
PMC 145-2 M/L
min. 800 mm

Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 210 / 240
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 / 6,5 * / 8
Groove clearance RA [mm] 10 / 12
Number of ropes max. 12
Number of grooves max. z 12
Type of groove seat / v-groove
Position of the rubber elements

5 No. of switching operations 180
Duty cycle ED % 40
Version of brake 2-surface disc brake (safety brake)
Scope of supply machine frame: option: with manual release
1 Rope cover Brake monitoring with microswitch
2 Console Protection class IP 21
3 Rubber element Pulley diameter DT [mm] 150 / 240
4 Frame telescopable
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
5 Axle, diverter pulley

ModKit ModKit
MO61 E MO61 CRX

Dimensions The solution for plastic-coated ropes
56
56 405 56
56
Compared to steel ropes with the same diameter, plastic-coated
Gearless
Gearless
ropes have a higher friction coefficient and higher breaking
strength. Thanks to the higher friction coefficient, the forces
1
268
required can be transferred at a lower wrap-around angle.
478
395 /700
Due to the lower D/d ration when using this rope, it is possible
to use smaller diameter traction sheaves. This means given
the same drive power, greater torque is available with a smaller
990 /1295
traction sheave diameter. An economic solution is possible with
56
fewer ropes and a smaller drive by using plastic-coated ropes.
2
590 /895
EN 81-20 only describes the use of steel ropes with a nominal

diameter of at least 8 mm and a D/d ratio of at least 40.
1
395 /700
Given the corresponding authorisation and type approval test, it
is possible to deviate from this standard if the measures descri-
990 /1295
330
AS
bed in the authorisation conditions for use and the requirements
L
50
demanded for operation are complied with.
0
-1
2 The trend to increasingly small traction sheaves makes it ne-
590 /895
40
0
m
cessary to look for corresponding solutions with regard to the
m
91 ASL 42 traction capacity.
157
330
3 The solution here is the ModKit MO61 CRX for plastic-

4 coated ropes
91 ASL 42 It consists of the PMC 145-2 drive, with a traction sheave diameter of 150 mm for up to 11 ropes with 6 mm diameter
157 (manufacturer Drako PTX 300) or up to 6 ropes with 8,1 mm diameter (manufacturer Brugg CTP 8.1 G2). The machi-
3 ne-frame is telescopic and as a result can be adjusted to the required ASL dimension. Insulation elements and rope
4
56 268 protection according to EN 81-20 are included in delivery.
42
591
5
395 /700
aschinenrahmen:
3
56
Lieferumfang Maschinenrahmen:
1
g
5 9 1 ASL
750
1 Seilabdeckung Technical Data

750
A
2 Konsole
405
Type of Machine PMC 145-2

591
4
3 Gummielemente Suspension r 1:1

e Rated load Q [kg] 630
4 Rahmen teleskopierbar
F [kg]
kopierbar 5 Achse, Ableitrolle
Mass of car
Rated speed v [m/s]
900
1,0
56
91
A
trolle 5
330
706 bis 1011 1011 bis 1317

478 56 750
595 bis 900 900 bis 1206

157
A Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 150

ASL 595 bis 900 900 bis 1206
A 706 bis 1011 1011 bis 1317
590 /895
5 Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 8,1
Number of ropes max. 7 6
bis 900Scope of900
supplybis
machine 1206
Type of rope DRAKO PTX 300 Brugg CTP 8.1 G2
fang Maschinenrahmen:
frame:
Number of grooves max. z 11 6
bis 1011 1011 bis 1317
990 /1295
1 Rope cover
Groove-type Round groove
2 Console
(Sample configuration)
n teleskopierbar
3 Rubber element
4 Frame telescopable ASL 595 up to 900 900 up to 1206
, Ableitrolle
5 Axle, diverter pulley A 706 up to1011 1011 up to 1317

bdeckung
elemente

le
L
ModKit Compact-Gearless
MO61 CRX SC-Series

Gearless
Gearless
Technical notes on the use of plastic-
coated steel ropes
The requirements for the area of use,

ambient conditions and state of wear are
described in the particular type approval
certificate for the rope. Among other things,
the replacement criteria depend on a speci-
fied number of travels or duration of use. For
this purpose it is necessary that the travel
number (change of direction) is recorded by
a manipulation-proof trip meter and that the
lift is immobilised upon reaching this travel
number. The ropes must be checked for
wear and damage; here too the discard cri-
teria defined in the type approval certificate
must be observed.
The traction sheaves and rope pulleys have

a groove profile corresponding to the infor-
mation of the rope supplier.
Calculation of the traction capacity must be

performed according to the requirements in
EN 81.
The advice of the rope supplier provided on SC300/400/500

storage, transport, handling, mounting and Product description 92
operation of the ropes must be observed. In
Performance Matrix 93
particular, the ropes must be secured against
SC300 94
twisting and the special information of the
rope supplier regarding diagonal pull com- SC400 95
plied with SC500 96
Colouring for all Drives 100

Compact-Gearless Compact-Gearless
SC EN 81- Performance Matrix

20/ -50
Range of synchronous gearless machines for machine room

Gearless
Gearless
The synchronous COMPACT-Gearless ranging from 19.4 kW up to 48.6 kW and Package Solution suspension 2:1 1:1
SC 300 is our workhorse for superior IP20 as standard protection class. High precision machine frames facilitate m/s 1,00 1,50 1,60 1,75 2,00 2,50 3,00 3,50 4,00 5,00 3,50 4,00 5,0
lifts. Capable of rated loads up to The power spectrum of the SC500 ran- the construction of lifts with double wrap. If
1600kg with 2:1 suspension or for desired you can also obtain a frame for single ft/min 200 350 500 800 1000 700 800 100
ges from 63 kW to 104 kW with protec-
operating speeds up to 3.5m/s. tion class IP21. wrap. kg lbs
The synchronous COMPACT-
320
450
Gearless SC 400 is the drive for Maintenance-Free
Compact Design 480 SC300S SC400S
high-speed lifts and heavy loads. As synchronous machine with a mono- Due to its design our COMPACT-Gearless has 630 45m 80m
Capable of rated loads up to 2750 kg bloc housing the SC-Series is very space- a small number of mechanical components.
908 2000 112m
with 2:1 suspension or for operating saving in both the S- an the M-version. In addition, since no oil is needed, a posi-
tive effect on maintenance and product life is 1000 45m 80m 112m 160m
speeds up to 4.0 m/s.
achieved. 1050
The SC500 rounds the performance 1135 2500 Low Rise
Double Safety
spectrum of the SC series upwards
The type-tested dual-circuit disc brake 1150 SC300M 120m
with speeds of 4.0 to 5.0 m/s at no- ensures safety at the best. This device is 1250 135m 100m
minal loads of 630 to 1800 kg (1: 1). certified as safety brake according to the 1350 SC5
European standard for lifts EN 81-20/-50. 1362 3000 SC400S
An additional and costly braking system 1400 160m
Excellent Motor Control for upwards braking operation is thus not
The vector controlled, synchronous 1590 3500
necessary.
machines with permanent magnet exci- 1600 100m 160m 130m
tation are known for outstanding driving 1650 45m 80m
comfort. They are available in several Super Quiet Machine 1700 160m
power classes ranging from 10 kW up Thanks to its excellent efficiency the SC 1800 80m SC400S 160m 160
to 24.8 kW and as standard in protec- 300 can pass on an additional ventilation. 1816 4000 SC400M
tion class IP 43 for SC300. The SC400 This results in a comfortable low sound- 1900
is available in several power classes pressure level. 2000 160m 160m
2042 4500
2200
2250
2270 5000 SC400M SC500
2400 100m
2500 200m
2724 6000
2750 80m
3000 200m
3200
3500
3600 120m
3632 8000
4000 75m
4100
4500
4540 10000
4700 on request
4800
5000
Travel heightTravel
data can vary data
height depending on car
can vary weight etc.
depending on Acar
check withetc..
weight LEKalk 3.0 is with
A check necessary.
the TLD is necessary.
Low Rise Mid Rise (Compact Gearless)

Compact-Gearless Compact-Gearless
SC300 EN 81- EN 81- SC400

20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
Produktkatalog Technische Daten - Compact gearless® SC400
Produktkatalog Technische Daten - Compact gearless®
Compact gearless® SC400
Compact gearless®
3.4.2 Maßblatt – Maschine SC300M

3.9 Maßblatt
SC300 auf
Maschinenrahmen

Type of machine S003 S004 M000 M001 M002 M005 M006 Type of machine M011 S004 M001 M008 S004 S007 S005 S003 M011 M012 M009 M010 M014
Suspension r 2:1 Suspension r 1:1 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1000 900 1800 1600 1350 1600 1250 Rated Load Q [kg] 1150 1000 1590 2000 1800 1700 1600 1400 2750 2500 2000 2000 1600
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5 3,0 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 Rated Speed max v [m/s] 3,5 4,0 1,52 1,78 2,54 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 5
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 410 440 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 560 440 440 560
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 10 Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 13 10 10 14
Number of Grooves max. z 8 Number of Grooves max. z 14 9 9 13/14
Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened 1)
Rated Power PN [kW] 10,0 11,0 12 14,2 15,0 10,7 15,3 16,7 18,2 19,5 21,6 1)
21,3 24,8 Rated Power PN [kW] 24 24,5 23 14,8 17,2 23,7 23 26 31 32 33 29,5 34 34,5 40 46 47
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 640 616 582 512 1175 1050 1000 860 950 780 Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1926 1720 1615 2135 2060 1615 1452 1444 1279 1154 2071 1899 1900 1607 1598 1609 1316
Number of Number of
Abbildung 3-2: Maßblatt SC300M 240 240
Switching Operations Switching Operations
Duty Cycle % 60 Duty Cycle % 50 60
Positionsbeschreibung zu Abbildung 3-2
Rated Current IN [A] 23 30 29 25 24 30,5 29 28,5 31,4 31,2 36,5 Rated Current IN [A] 46 41 36,5 50 55 36,5 50 51 50 49 54 63 54 72 74
1 mit Option 2.Geber 2 Handlüftung Bremse
Output Factor cos φ 0,95 0,96 0,94 0,95 0,96 Output Factor cos φ 0,93 0,94 0,93 0,94 91,1 91,3 90,7 91,1 91,4 0,93 0,95 0,96 0,96 0,95
3Brake Mitte Treibscheibe - Schwerpunkt
Monitoring Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch) Brake Monitoring Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch)
1) With current limitation to 100 A Abbildung 3-10: Maßblatt SC400
1) Optional double wrap with semicircular groove
(dargestellt mit Treibscheibe DT=560 mm / B=265 mm)

Positionsbeschreibung zu Abbildung 3-10
Compact-Gearless External Rotor Gearless
SC500 EN 81- DAB-Series

20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
Technik
Abmessungen 29
2.5 Abmessungen
2.5.1 Maschine
DAB 530
Product description 98
Technical Data Technical data 99
Type of machine M001 M002 M003 M004 M005
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 Colouring for all Drives 100
Rated Load Q [kg] 1800 1600 3000 2500
Rated Speed max v [m/s] 4,0 5,0 6,0 4,0 5,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 560
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 13
Number of Grooves max. z 8 - 10
Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened1)
Rated Power PN [kW] 63 93 104 76 102
Rated ATR_2_12_0042_0
Abb. 18 Torque MN [Nm] 4400 5200 4850 2650 2850
NumberBezeichnung
Pos. of Switching Operations Pos. Bezeichnung 240
1 Cycle
Duty Manuelle Bremslüftung; Hebel
% aufgesteckt 2 Luftführung der Maschinenbelüftung
50
Rated Current IN [A] 105 Minimaler Wartungsbereich für Bremseinstel-
163 176 110 149
3 Schwerpunkt
Output Factor cos φ 0,87 4 lung,0,83
manuelle Bremslüftung
0,85 und Nutzung 0,95
Handrad
Brake Monitoring Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch)
Empfohlener Wartungsbereich für Drehgeber-
5
Wechsel
1) Optional double wrap with semicircular groove

External Rotor Gearless External Rotor Gearless
DAB EN 81- DAB530

Product Description 20/ -50
-conform
General description ches is part of the type approval.

Gearless
Gearless
The machines are configured for thermal
The DAB external rotor gearless systems class F and are used according to class B. Traction sheave
consist of the following main assemblies: Thermal monitoring is by means of a PTC
thermistor (130 °C ± 5 °C). The DAB external rotor gearless systems have a
• Pedestal bearing AS with add-on lifting For cooling the machine, there are fan wheels traction sheave mounted on roller bearings with
magnets, braking device and terminal on both sides of the rotor for self-cooling. integrated brake disc.
box • Version with semi-circular grooves preferably
• Pedestal bearing BS Brake with DW.
• Axle screw-connected to pedestal bea- • Version with seat and vee grooves preferably
ring AS and BS. The redundant brake (unit type: outside brake with SW.
• Traction sheave with integrated brake shoe) of the machine consists of two separa- Different diameters of traction sheave are available
disc mounted on roller bearings on axle tely arranged brake circuits (brake shoes with for DAB530L/XL.
• Rotor with vanes bolted onto both sides compression springs) that directly affect the
of the traction sheave brake disc. The brake serves as the opera- Actual-value sensor
• Stator screw-connected with axle tional brake and additionally performs the
• Protective hood for cover of rotor and function of a braking device for protection of The speed of the DAB external rotor gearless is pi-
vanes the upwardly moving elevator car against over- cked up by a magnetic encoder with square wave
• The pedestal bearings are fixed via the speed in accordance with EN 81-20/5.6.6 and pulses built into the pedestal bearing AS.
machine base frame. In the case of sepa- against unintended movements of the elevator For additional safety monitoring, a second pulse
rate transport without the machine base car in accordance with EN 81-20/5.6.7. encoder of the type for speed monitoring is possib-
frame, a transport frame is required. le as an option.
The brake circuits can be manually released
The DAB external rotor gearless systems individually or jointly with a plug-in brake
correspond to description IM B3 in accor- release lever.
dance with EN 60034-7 and comply with
the European standard. The brake circuits are released electroma-
gnetically during operation via lifting magnets.
The machines are conceived for the machi- The brake circuits are each equipped with a
ne room for various rope pull directions in test switch for monitoring (brake release and Technical Data DAB530*
DAB530L DAB530XL
combination with the standardised machine brake lining wear). Moreover, each brake has Machine
r 1:1 2:1
base frame. Deviating rope pull directions an integrated overvoltage suppressor circuit Suspension
Q [kg] 2400 2250 5000 4500 4700 4100
(e.g. vertically upwards or horizontally) must (varistor). Rated load
v [m/s] 3,5 4,0 2,0 2,5 3,5 4,0
be technically tested For the electric connection, a terminal box with Rated speed
DT [mm] 700 740
terminal strip and cable gland are fitted on Diameter Traction Sheave
The roller bearings for traction sheave each lifting magnet. max. Numbers of Grooves z 20 x Ø 16 // 20 Ø 5/8 “ // 14 x Ø 18
mounting can be re-lubricated via lubrica- Type of Groove seat / vee / semicircular groove
PN [kW]
tion nipples. The braking device with the brake test swit- Rated Power 50,6 57,5 64,0 77,3 88,5
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 5040 5600 5430 4670 4083
permitted radial Axle Load [kN] 450
Weight [kg] 4000 4300
Number of Operations 240
Duty Cycle % 60
Rated Current IN [A] 103 106 115 132 169 164
Output Factor cos φ 0,77 0,82 0,83 0,86 0,77 0,8
Version of Brake external dual circuit shoe brake
Brake Monitoring temperature monitoring
Protection Class IP20
* Standard values

Colouring Drive Accessories
Colouring for all Drives Drive Accessories

and machine frame
Drives
Drive Assessories
RAL 7021 – Black grey RAL 7005 – Mouse grey
Colour of the machine base frames
The paintwork of drives is the environmentally friendly The machine base frames will continue to be supplied
hydro-paint in the colour RAL 7021 (Black grey). with a high-quality powder coating in a colour similar
to RAL 7005 (Mouse grey). A polyester epoxy powder
Advantages of the new hydro-paint: mix with a coating thickness of approx. 60 μm is used.
• Two-component water-based paint with higher Galvanised add-on parts are not painted.
impact strength
• Complies with the VOC Directive (Volatile This changeover means that the drives and the optional
Organic Compounds) and thus very environ- machine base frame will consistently have a technologi-
mentally compatible cally superior and environmentally compatible surface
• Resistant to solvents, alkaline solutions and coating. It will also lend the entire drive unit an even
synthetic oils more attractive appearance.
Brake control for operational brakes 102

• BS3 103
• BSV2 and BSV4 104
• BSV1 105
UCM-Modul incl. Shaft Encoder 106

Drive Accessories Drive Accessories
Brake Control for Operational Brakes and NBS BS3

In gearless and geared drives
Drive Assessories
Drive Assessories
The operational brakes and NBS systems of the gearless and geared drives are closed in de-energised condition. Brake control 3 serves to activate brake magnets for ele-
To enable the brake to be opened, the brake magnets of the two brake circuits must be energised. Depending on the vator drives.
brake design, the brake is opened with high-speed excitation and kept open with reduced voltage. There are also
brakes that are opened without high-speed excitation. Design
Brake control 3 consists of a control board, an integrated
Selection of the brake control for different brakes depends on the high-speed excitation voltage and holding voltage power filter and the
required and the current needed. connection terminals for mounting on a top hat rail.
The table below shows the assignment of the drives with brakes to the different brake controls:
Operation
The direct voltage required for the brake magnets is ge-
nerated via a bridge
rectifier and downstream pulse width modulation with
output filter. A varistor
protection circuit is provided at the output.
Overview brake control, assigned to drive. An integrated power filter ensures compliance with the
BS 3 BSV 2 BSV 2 BSV 4 BSV 1 EMC limit values.
Drive unit (50-60 Hz) (50 Hz) (60 Hz) (50 Hz) (50-60 Hz)
180/90V, 207/104V,
The brake circuits are connected in series. 180/90V 180/90V 207/144V 2,0-7,8A Technical Data
Exceptions DAF210L with manual release. 207/207V, 207/144V
6510 000 9263 65 100 27 68 0 6510 000 9262 6510 000 92 65 65 000 06 67 0 Part number: 6510 000 9263
TW45C x x x Nominal system voltage: 230 V AC
TW63B
Geared machine
x x x
Line fuse
TW130 x x x 230V F,4AT
(glass fuse on the PCB)
TW130 200Nm 180/90V x x
TW160 x x Frequency of system voltage: 48-63 Hz
W263C x x x • 180/90V
• 207/103V
W322C x
Braking voltages: • 207/144V
DAF210 207/104V x • overexcitation continously on 180V or 207V
207/104V • additional freely programmable braking voltage
DAF210, manually released* x
207/207V Nominal output current: 1,5 A
DAF270 x
207/207V Maximum output current: 3 A (for overexcitation time, max. 2 sec.)
DAF270, manually released* x
Switch ON duration: 100 % ED; 60% ED with continuous overexcitation
DAF270XL 2x2200Nm
Gearless machine
x
SC300 180/90V x x x Level of protection: IP20
SC400 x Ambient operating temperature: 0° - 50°C
SC500 x Relative air humidity: no condensation 10…95%r.H., annual mean 70 %
PMC125 x x Max. site altitude above sea level: 1000 m without derating
PMC145-2 x x
207/144V EMC check: compliance with EN 12015 and EN 12016
PMC145-2, manually released* x x
Mounting: top hat rail
PMC170 x x
PMC170, manually released* x x Dimensions (LxBxH) 170 x 125 x 78 mm
DAB450/530 180/90V x Weight approx. 1,00 kg

*) with optional manual release
When using the drives with the MFC 30/31-xx inverters in plug&play design or MFR, the brake control is integrated in
the inverter.
The different brake controls with their technical data are described below.

Drive Accessories Drive Accessories
BSV2 and BSV4 BSV1

Drive Assessories
Drive Assessories
The brake control 2 and 4 is used to activate brake The brake control BSV1 is designed for activating
magnets for elevator drives with rated currents of brake magnets at rated currents of 2.0 A to 7.8 A.
0.25 - 1.25 A With BSV 1 the preselected current will always
flow independent of line voltage fluctuations. The
Structure effective force of the brake magnets and conse-
The brake control 2 and 4 consists of a control quently their noise response during activation can
board, a power filter and the connection terminals. be influenced by means of the current to be set
The components are mounted on a steel bracket through jumpers.
and covered with a perspex sheet to prevent human
contact with live parts. Configuration
The brake control BSV1 consists of the power part,
Operation the control board and the filter board. All parts are
The direct current for the brake magnets is genera- mounted on a heat sink, including the terminals
ted via a semi-controlled bridge rectifier. The bridge for the main connections. The heat sink is isolated
rectifier is activated by a phase-control module. The from the remaining assemblies and is applied to
bridge rectifier is equipped with a free wheeling diode as well as a varistor protection circuit at the output. An integra- protective earth potential (PE). The heat sink is
ted power filter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values. After applying the mains voltage (230 V AC), there is also used for fastening the assembly in the control
an output voltage according to Table 1 at the output of terminal 10 - and terminal 20 + . Connecting connections 10 cabinet.
and 22 reduces the output voltage after approx. 1 second to approx. retentive voltage.
Mode of operation
BSV1 is designed as current controller and has PI characteristic. The reference current value is generated on the
control board. The desired continuous current (which normally corresponds to the holding current of the brake re-
lease magnets) is preselected by means of jumpers J1 and J2 in increments of 0.2 A in the range of 2 A to 7.8 A.
Technical data Brake control 2 and brake control 4 Technical data of BSV1
Brake control 2 Brake control 2 60Hz Brake control 4 Part number 65 000 06 67 0
Part number 65 100 27 68 0 6510 000 9262 6510 0009265 230 V AC – 15% to 400 V AC + 10%, 2- phase or phase – N (note operating
Nominal system voltage:
conditions of connected brake release magnets)
Nominal system voltage: 230VAC
Frequency of system voltage: 50 Hz bzw. 60 Hz
Line fuse
230V F 3,15A
(glass fuse on the PCB) Supply voltage for internal power
230V AC + 10% / - 15%, 50/60 Hz
supply:
Frequency of system voltage: 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz
Continuous (stabilized) current is equivalent to holding current of brake: 2A
Output current:
Output voltage (retentive voltage)* 90V 90V 144V to 7.8 A, to be preselected in increments of 0.2 A.
Overexcitation voltage* 180V 180V 200V (Stabilized) pick-up current: Twice the value of the preselected continuous current for one second
Output current max. 2,5A Mode of operation: S4
Activation period 100% ED Activation period: 75% ED
Type of protection IP00 Max. operating frequency: 260 circuits / hour
Ambient operating temperature 0° - 50°C Type of protection: IP00
Relative air humidity: max. 70% Ambient operating temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Relative air humidity: max. 70%
max. site altitude amsl 2000m without derating (derating above this to 3500m: derating 1% pro 100m
2000 m without derating derating of 1% per 100m above
EMV check The requirements of EN 12015 and EN 12016 are complied with max. site altitude amsl:
2000 m to 3500 m
Dimensions L*B*H 180mm*120mm*103mm compliance with requirements of EN 12015 (interference) and
EMV check:
EN 12016 (immunity).
Weight 1,1 kg
Dimensions L*B*H: 165 x 200 x 93 mm
* all data refer to the rated connection voltage
Weight 2,2 kg

UCM-Modul UCM-Modul
Incl. Shaf Encoder Incl. Shaft Encoder

Drive Assessories
Drive Assessories
Control
The twin encoder is mounted in the shaft.

Our mounting-set consists of:
• An universal fixing for the guide rails

• Toothed belt (length depends on the travel height) for the encoder drive
• Diverter pulleys for the shaft pit.
The UCM-module has to be integrated in to the control. Due to the small

dimensions of the module the installation is very easy and doesn´t pose any
problems.
For the operation with an overspeed governor an additional emergency

power supply is neccessary. Therefore the governor doesn´t stop the machi-
ne in case of power breakdown unless there is no error message. With our type-examination tested combination of UCM-module and twin shaft
encoder, fulfillment of UCM very easy.
This solution can be integrated very fast and easy in rope elevators and also in
hydraulic elevators.
Thanks to its autonomous operation the module can be used universally with
almost any controller and EN 81-20/-50 certified emergency stop facilities.
Gearless machine Geared machine incl. NBS Geared machine without NBS Hydraulic
Technical data
Supply voltage 24V
Power consumption 4W
Safety circuit voltage 230V
1:1 Triggering speed max. 0,2 m/s

Triggering distance max. 100 mm
- Bucher DSV-A3 valve
- Stopping the machine - Stopping the machine
stopps the flow at the Triggerung time max. 50 ms
- Activating the UCM - Activating the UCM
piston Speed max. 3,5 m/s
brake device brake device
Type of incremental encoder HTL-1024 Imp./U.
Travel height 55 m (higher travel heights on request)
- Stopping the machine

- activates locking
And that´s how it works:
device
- activates safety gear 2:1 The device monitors the movement of the car through two independent evaluation channels. The
speed and traveling distance are monitored as from the start of the travel operation. As soon as
- activates locking device
the door contact is interrupted and the speed exceeds a value of 0.2 m/s, or the covered distance
- activates safety gear
is greater than 100 mm, safety relays will be turned off.
The redundant encoder system consists of two encoders and has a belt crack monitoring incl.
safety switch.

Frequency Inverter
Own Notes MFC and MFR
Frequency Inverter
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MFC 20/21, Product description 110

MFC 30/31, Product description 112
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18, with Regeneration 114
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Frequency Inverter Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21 MFC 20/21

Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
Current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftE-
quip are designed for controlling asynchronous (MFC 20) or Technical data
synchronous (MFC 21) drives. Inverter type MFC 20/21-... 15 32 48 60 105
Frequency inverter package Motor power [kW] 7,5 15 22 30 45
In addition to the inverter, it contains the mains filter and the
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
power choke for connecting to TN, TT and IT power supply sys-
tems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % up to 415, +10 %
interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
Nominal input current [A] 16 27 43 52 92
Safe evacuation and maintenance Maximum input current [A] 26 42 64 95 145
In the event of failure of the power supply, a single-phase UPS
Line fuses AFF (external)* [A] 25 40 63 80
(uninterruptible power supply) enables emergency operation. If,
during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the opera- Conductor cross section [mm²] 2,5 6 10 16 25
tional brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE)
optional coasting device limits the car speed to safe values by
connecting an additional resistor. Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 350
Nominal output current, Irated [A] 18 32 50 60 115
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. You Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax [A] 30 48 75 110 180
can thus easily and quickly select the relevant motor. Special and Nominal output power [kVA] 11 20 31 36 70
time-consuming motor parameterisation is thereby avoided. The
motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotun- Maximum output power for 10 s [kVA] 18,5 30 46 60 110
ing. Conductor cross section [mm²] 2,5 6 10 16 35
Simple parameter entry Loss at rated power [W] 350 600 900 1200 2100
The MFC 20/21 inverter is equipped with a control panel with Total efficiency 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, accelera-
tion, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction MECHANICAL DATA
sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Width [mm] 305 305 330 334 440
Height [mm] 345 345 460 523 900
Depth [mm] 207 207 223 295 278
Additional for connector [mm] + 70 + 70 + 70 0 0
Minimum top / bottom clearance [mm] 100 / 100
Fan power, free blowing [m³/h] 140 140 360 360 620
Weight [kg] 17 18 26 35 59
* Duty class gR

MFC 30/31 MFC 30/31

Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
Plug&Play current vector-controlled frequency inverters from
LiftEquip are the optimal addition for controlling asynchronous Technical data
(MFC 30) or synchronous (MFC 31) drives. Inverter type MFC 30/31-... 10 15 26 40 60 50R 100R 155R 310R
Ready-to-install inverter package Motor power [kW] 5 7,5 11 18,5 30 18,5 37 55 110
In addition to the inverter, it contains the brake controller, the mains
Input data (mains side)
filter, the power choke and the travel contactors completely wired
and integrated in the housing for connection to TN, TT and IT power Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % up to 415, +10 %
supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the Nominal input current [A] 10 16 23 34 52 36 72 105 180
DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
Maximum input current [A] 17 26 38 55 95 85 170 315 630
EN81-A3 Line fuses AFF (internal) [A] 25 40 63 80 80 135 200 400
With integrated speed monitoring and the standard HSD circuit
board, our MFC 30/31 frequency inverter, when used together with Conductor cross section [mm²] 2,5 2,5 4 6 16 10 25 35 95
a suitable controller, is ideal for satisfying the requirements of UCM. Output data (motor side)
Safe evacuation and maintenance Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 350 - 10 3 AC 440 3 AC 450
In the event of a power failure, emergency operation is possible via Nominal output current, Irated [A] 12 18 27 42 60 35 64 104 180
a UPS (uninterruptible power supply). If, during maintenance, the
controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax [A] 18 30 43 67 110 75 150 225 450
gearless machine is released, an optionally available coasting device Nominal output power [kW] 7,2 11 16 25 36 24 48 81 140
limits the car speed by connecting an additional resistor.
Maximum output power for 10 s [kVA] 11 18,5 26 40 60 51 102 187 375
Simple parameter entry Conductor cross section [mm²] 2,5 2,5 4 10 16 6 16 35 95 / 2x35
The MFC 30/31 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-
Loss at rated power [W] 220 330 500 800 1200 750 1500 2000 4000
line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated
motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, Total efficiency 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Mechanical data
Additional safety Width [mm] 244 309 309 333 344 401 600 1000 1400
Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake Height [mm] 387 715 715 1090 1263 1105 2000 2200 2200
via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our
drives (version SA3) for evaluating the brake condition must be con- Depth [mm] 260 263 263 270 340 284 470 600 600
nected to the controller in accordance with EN 81. The integrated Fan power, free blowing [m³/h] 80 140 140 360 360 360 700 1000 1000
travel contactors are also monitored for "switching of the contactors
after change of run direction" as set out in EN 81. Weight [kg] 19 35 38 55 81 80 195 460 750
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. The mo-
tor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning.

MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18 MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18

with regeneration with regeneration
Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
A very compact device for inverter and regenerative mode
Technical data
The patented, energy-regenerating MFR frequency invert- Inverter type MFR 5.5 7.5 18
ers from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for the energy- Motor power [kW] 5,5 7,5 18,5
efficient control of synchronous drives.
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
Ready-to-install inverter package Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % up to 460, +15 %
The MFR frequency inverters include energy recovery, elec-
tronic brake controllers, mains filter, power choke and the Line frequency [Hz] nominal 50, range 48 ... 63
electronic travel contactors. Control takes place via parallel, Continuous input current (thermal) [A] 10 14 36
DCP or CANopen interface. Maximum input current [A] 20 30 75
EN81-A3 OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE)
Electronic travel contactors and an electronic brake control- Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 0…input voltage (max. 340 V
ler (within the standard scope of supply) enable a uniquely
for motor design)
fast shutdown time of the drive. With our integrated speed
monitoring and a suitable controller, you have the safest Nominal output current, Irated [A] 12 18 42
and fastest solution for satisfying UCM requirements. Maximum output current for 3 s, Imax [A] 21,8 33,5 75
Energy-saving function Conductor cross section [mm²] 2,5 2,5 10
In addition to energy recovery, our MFR inverters also offer Loss at rated power [W] 350 500 1200
the possibility to further save energy in standby mode (ap- Total efficiency 0,95 0,95 0,95
prox. 17 watt).
Type of protection IP21
Simple parameter entry MECHANICAL DATA
The MFC inverter is equipped with a control panel with a
two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, accelera- Width [mm] 330 330 353
tion, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, Height [mm] 614,5 614,5 971,8
traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in Depth [mm] 196 196 207,5
physical values. Remote parameterisation via DCP and
Minimum top / bottom clearance [mm] 0/100 100/100
CANopen is possible.
Fan power, free blowing [m³/h] 140 140 300
Additional safety
Weight [kg] 18,4 18,4 43,5
Our inverter package controls the release of the operational
brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring Radio interference (emission) according to EN12015
switches of our drives, for evaluating the brake condition, Immunity to EN12016
can be connected to the inverter in accordance with EN 81. Power dissipation in standby mode max. 17 W
PlugPlay device (complete inverter with regeneration)
Interfaces
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. • CANopen
Third-party motors can be matched to the inverter by enter- - Position Mode
ing the motor data. - Velocity Mode
• DCP
- 03
- 04
• Parallel
The motor parameters can be programmed on re-

quest.


Energy efficiency by energy recovery Energy efficiency by energy recovery
supplied back to the power supply net-

Visualization of system data – UK
Table: System data of the measured
Technical Report - Energy efficiency by energy recovery
Technical Report - Energy efficiency by energy recovery

elevator system work is not possible. But since every
building has a regular basic energy de-
Energy efficiency by energy recovery Passenger elevator
Rated Load 1.000 kg
mand, the energy as a rule is con-
sumed in the building. So energy is
Jörg Hellmich , Volker Lenzner
1) 2) Passenger 13 available to the building which does
Rated Speed 1.6 m/s not have to be procured from an exter-
Travel height 13.93 m nal source.
Using the CANopen-Lift standard, sys- only be controlled using additional air-  How much energy is recovered?
tem data from the control system and conditioning systems in the machine Landing 4 During the four days of the interlift
 When is energy recovery worthwhile?
components are available on the bus room. Suspension 2:1 2015 exhibition a total of 1982 rides
in real time. With the flexiPage sys-  What does the energy recovery cost? Location drive down/beside were made with the elevator, 27.5 kWh
In standard applications and in eleva-
tem of Elfin the data are edited and  What happens to the recovered Drive LiftEquip PMC
being drawn from the power supply for
tor systems that are not very frequent-
visualized in a flexible manner. On the energy? 170L007 the traction operation and 8.1 kWh be-
ed, an energy recovery system has of-
occasion of the interlift 2015 the Lift- Diameter of traction 400 mm
ing produced in the regenerative mode
ten been excluded since most of the It is obvious from explanations earlier
Equip company presented the energy sheave and supplied back to the building’s
energy (70 to 80 %) of these systems is in this paper that there is no collective
recovery topic by way of the energy Ropes 5 x 8 mm power supply network. With a charge
needed during standby. It made more answer to these questions since a lot of
data example. (Drako 250 T) of 0.29 € per kWh this corresponds to
sense for these particular elevator sys- individual parameters need to be taken
Frequency inverter LiftEquip MFR 18 savings of 2.35 € for the four days and
In the past the elevator energy efficien- tems only to take measures which re- into account. annual savings of 214.40 €.
cy topic has already been discussed on duce the standby consumption. Control system Böhnke&Partner
Prior the interlift exhibition, LiftEquip, bp308 CANopen Energy recovery not only results in a
numerous occasions also in connec-
Many frequency converter systems Böhnke + Partner and Elfin jointly better energy classification of the ele-
tion with the energy recovery and sev- Car light LED
that are available on the market and al- thought about ways to visualise the Fig. 3: Presentation of the current system vator system but also directly yields an
eral papers have been presented on Energy measurement Janitza
low energy to be recovered consist of ”energy recovery” topic in a simple data and measurements
economic benefit. Depending on the
different conferences. Screen Elfin flexyPage
two separate components; the actual and informative manner. degree of utilization elevators provide
which indicates whether the elevator is
Since the energy saving ordinance frequency converter and the separate
For this purpose an elevator in one of drawing energy from the power system different savings which may some-
(EnEV) fails to name the elevator, no energy recovery unit. In this constella- the aid of this system the exhibition
LiftEquip’s buildings was modified. In or is working in a regenerative mode times prove to be quite small. But in
concrete measures are defined which tion the extra costs must be identified visitors could enter car calls and di-
the elevator with CANopen-Lift capabil- and supplies energy back into the pow- view of the total number of elevators
need to be taken and met. But even and the standby energy demand of the rectly follow the ride movements of the
ities a converter of the MFR series is er system. In conjunction with the two (in Germany approx. 700,000 systems)
without these specific EnEv require- energy recovery unit must be exam- elevator and the flow of energy caused
controlled by a bp308 control system. measured data of the total energy the saving potential cannot be ignored.
ments there have been various ap- ined. Often the investment for systems by the operation.
The following table shows the system drawn from and supplied back to pow- Whenever this is economically possi-
proaches in the past to reduce the en- with a low performance and utilization
parameters of the system used. Apart from the system parameters and er system and the direct display of the ble, one should therefore always in-
ergy demand of elevator systems. is economically unwise.
the system’s position, the screen also energy costs saved, the observer got clude the energy recovery option when
For measuring the energy demand the
The directive VDI 4707 in parts 1 and 2 With the converter of the MFR series displayed the system’s calls, the cur- an idea of the efficiency of the energy installing new elevator systems. And
elevator was equipped with an energy
first of all considered on a national lev- LiftEquip offers a system with an inte- rent floor position and the ride direc- recovery system. even when systems are only modern-
measuring system of Janitza and the
el the energy topic for elevators and el- grated energy recovery unit which re- tion. A new pointer instrument was de- ized and the drive system is replaced,
measured data were made available on In order to be able to display the mode
evator components which was later al- covers energy from the first ride on- veloped for displaying the performance energy recovery is an option to contrib-
the CANopen bus. Using the Elfin flexy- of operation of the energy recovery
so described on an international scale ward at no extra cost and as such ute to a reduction of the CO2 level and
Page system the measured data were system in connection with the load
in the ISO 25 745-1 standard which is contributes to the economic efficiency to the protection of the overall environ-
read from the bus and transferred to- condition, it is planned to equip the el-
largely based on the principles of the of the elevator system. ment.
gether with the current position values, evator with new load measuring sen-
VDI directive.
In discussions held with planners, op- the ride counter and the live picture of sors which can make available the cur-
For the operation of the elevator this Summary
erators and elevator manufacturers a video camera via a safe VPN connec- rent load on the CAN bus.
paper takes a look at the ‚riding’ and the following questions frequently crop tion to the exhibition stand where they The publication of VDI 4707 turned the
Since the MFR converter of LiftEquip is
’standby’ operating conditions and us- up: were visualized on a big screen. With spotlight on the energy demand of ele-
offered at no extra cost compared to
es defined utilization categories to take vators. The project described in this
into account the rides needed to deter-
the MFC converter with the same per-
paper clearly shows how intelligent en-
mine the overall efficiency of the sys- formance, every kilowatt hour supplied
ergy recovery applications allow ener-
tem. In the ’riding’ operating mode the back to the power system is a direct
gy to be saved from the first ride on-
converter is the component which by saving.
Motor Motor ward. Other savings are achieved by
using the energy recovery instrument 400V/50Hz
Since elevators are not subject to the networking the components via the
can make a major contribution to the Renewable Energy Act a refund for en- open standard CANopen-Lift allowing
elevator’s energy efficiency. Input rectifier DC link Converter on the input end DC link
ergy not consumed in the building and energetically optimized ride curves
In the past energy recovery systems Brake resistor with Converter on the motor end Regenerator with brake Converter on the motor end and a distinct reduction of the energy
regenerator resistor not applicable
Household 1
have been used primarily in high-fre- demand in standby mode. CANopen-
quency systems and plants with high Lift is also the basis for the measure-
Household 2
frequency converter outputs to reduce Converter ment, visualization and transmission
the generation of heat of the regenera- 400 V / 50 Hz /3p General supply meter of energy values with the flexyPage
tion resistors which is critical in many or
system. In conjunction with other sen-
applications and which sometimes can sor data, the networking option pro-
Energy vides additional possibilities for an en-
recovery unit Lighting
200 W
Heating
200 W
Elevator
300 W ergetic optimization of components
1) Elfin Fig. 4: Energy drawn from the power sup- and systems in special operating con-
2) LiftEquip Fig. 1: Converter operation with and without energy recovery ply in the building ditions.
18 LIFT-REPORT 42. Jahrg. (2016) Heft 1 20 LIFT-REPORT 42. Jahrg. (2016) Heft 1

Car Sling
Own Notes Car Sling FleCS
Car Sling
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ FleCS F2/F4

Product Description 120
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Technical Data 121
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Dimensions 123
Performance data/technical description 124
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Version 125
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Variants 126
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Car Sling Car Sling
FleCS F2/F4 FleCS F2/F4

Product Description Technical data
Car Sling
Car Sling
FleCS F2 Version presented for suspension
The car frame FleCS is designed sible under cramped conditions, since 2:1 with two rope pulleys, without
for pas-senger and cargo lifts with elements bolted together. rope pulley insulation, with sliding
nominal loads up to 4000 kg. It
Innovation guides (left side) and roller guides
is also suitable for new lifts and
Well-conceived design with integrated (right side), without braking system
modernisation.
attachment options for a multitude of in upward direction.
• For sheet metal, glass and panorama attachments: Rope anchorage, traction
cars sheaves, load measurement, balance
• For standard & high performance lifts rope, car buffer, guide rails, lift cable, etc.
• According to new EN 81-20/-50
Scope of delivery
Safety • Scope of delivery of car frame can be
Construction calculated, optimised and adjusted to project-specific require-
demonstrably safe in design according to ments.
the finite-elements-method (FEM). • Wide range of options and special
Comfort versions available, with prepared
• Vibration-insulated bearing of the car structure.
through helical compres-sion springs Interfaces
• Smooth-running polyamide pulley
sheaves, cast rope pulleys optional The series of the car frame FleCS is
• Roller guides optional suitable for the installation of own cars,
because the inferfaces to the car are
Flexibility defined.
Installation of the car frame also pos-
Main performance data

Car frame FleCS F2 FleCS F4
Other versions
Nominal load Q max. 2600 kg 4000 kg
Speed v ≤ 4,0 m/s ≤ 2,5 m/s
Car width CW 900-2200 mm 1270-3000 mm

2:1 Version presented for suspension
2:1 with a rope pulley, without rope
Car height CH 2000-2700 mm 2000-3000 mm pulley insulation, with sliding guides
CH + FBOH + 62 mm 1 (left side) and roller guides (right
Car attachment height FBEH CH + FBOH + 56,5 mm side)
CH + FBOH + 631 mm 2
For rope suspension 1:1 / 2:1 1:1 / 2:1 / 3:1 / 4:1
Lubricator-/roller guides l/¡ l/¡

Progressive safety gear (down-
l l
wards)
Braking system (upwards) ¡ ¡ 1:1 Version presented for suspension

1:1, with sliding guides (left side)
l Standard, ¡ Option, 1 Car P3000/P4000, 2 Car P2000 MR1, FBOH – car floor height
and roller guides (right side)

Car Sling Car Sling

Technical data Dimensions
Car Sling
Car Sling
FleCS F4
Car width KB [mm] 900-2200 1270-3000
min. 1250 (P2000 MR1, P3000)/
Car depth KT [mm] 1000-3050
min. 1600 (P4000), max. 3500
Car height KH [mm] 2000-2700 2000-3000
KB + 50/60 KB + 60…210 (in 1 mm steps)
Car inside micrometre FKSTM [mm]
¡: KB + 40…210 (in 1 mm steps)
Clear width LB [mm] FKSTM – 26/36 (depending on sheet metal thickness) FKSTM – 38
Rope pulley diameter DSR [mm] Ø 320 Ø 400 Ø 540 Ø 400 Ø 540
for ropes (number x diameter) n x dr [mm] 8x8 10x6 8x10 7x13 8x10 7x13
Groove distance Ra [mm] 14 11 18 20,5 18 20,5
Axis distance rope pulley Ø 320 Ø 400 Ø 540 Ø 400 Ø 540
min. RA [mm] 394…580 474 614…750 420 560…896
max. FKSTM-(480…510) FKSTM-(670…750) FKSTM-(810…1150) FKSTM-(760…870) FKSTM-(880…1134)
124/174 (P2000 MR1, P3000),
Car height FBOH [mm] 100 (P1000), 110/124/174 (P4000)
110/124/174 (P4000)
KH + FBOH incl. flooring
Car attachment height FBEH [mm] KH + FBOH incl. flooring + 56,5 + 62 (P3000/P4000)
+ 631 (P2000 MR1)
KB – 70 (P3000/P4000), KB – 90 (P2000
Distance damper attachment top a [mm] KB - 70
MR1)
KB – 60 (distance ultra-bushes on strut attach-
Distance insulation bar bottom b [mm] KB – 70, KB – 50 (in brake) ment), KB – 180/520 (P2000 MR1),
KB – 270/610 (P3000), KB – 320 (P4000)
with 2 buffer plates:
FKSTM – 1050/870 (without/with balance ropes)
Distance of buffer plates PA [mm] 2 buffer plates: FKSTM – 430 / FKSTM – 550 (in WRG150)
with4 buffer plates: in addition
FKSTM – 140/1050 (without/with balance ropes)
FKSTM – 290 (in L180) / FKSTM – 430 (in
RT18) / FKSTM – 400 (in WRG200) /
Version presented with two rope pulleys, without rope pulley insulation, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side), without braking system in Distance between guide rails e [mm] FKSTM – 250 / FKSTM – 334 (in WRG150)
FKSTM – 334 (in WRG150)
the upward direction; side view with brace mounting (left) and without brace mounting (right)
Height support guide rails bottom (without/with
f [mm] 66/266 45/222
braking system)
Height lower beam HU [mm] 184…265 326/384,5 (without/with brake)
Height insulation bar h [mm] ca. 60 – (no insulation track)
Other versions Distance upper edge upper beam to cover rope pulley Ø 320: Ø 400: Ø 540: Ø 400: Ø 540:
without/with rope pulley insulation HOS [mm] 83/93…102 118/104 175,5/295,5 72 (2 SR) / 78 (1 SR) 140/72,5
with flat upper beam (FLOH) 99 – – – –
2:1 Version presented for suspension
Height upper beam Ø 320: Ø 400: Ø 540:
2:1 with a rope pulley, without rope
without rope pulley insulation 206(2SR)/240(1SR) 216(2SR)/240(1SR) 240 300/350/400
pulley insulation, with sliding guides with rope pulley insulation
OH [mm]
206(2SR)/240(1SR) 240 240 300/350/400
(left side) and roller guides (right with flat upper beam (FLOH) 165 – – –
side) distance lower edge upper beam to cover rope pulley Ø 320: Ø 400: Ø 540: Ø 400: Ø 540:
without/with roep pulley insulation HUS [mm] 48 83/73 145,5 0 67,5/187
Ø 540: 217 (without
Distance lower edge upper beam to car ceiling height Ø 320: Ø 400: Ø 540: Ø 400: 62 (P3000/P4000)/
RP-insul.)/
HO [mm] 100 100 220 631 (P2000 MR1) 267 (1:1, with RP-insul.)
Height damper i [mm] 115 (0 with FLOH) 40 (OH) Upper beam
1:1 Version presented for supspension
Distance floor attachment bottom q [mm] 715 –
(without strut attach-
1:1, with sliding guides (left side) ment)
and roller guides (right side) Width side beam o [mm] 309 395
Distance damper attachment top r [mm] Ø 320: 393 Ø 400: 413 Ø 540: 413 460
l Standard, ¡ Option, – unavailable

Car Sling Car Sling

Performance data / technical description Versions
Car Sling
Car Sling
Integrated guide rail (for F2)
Nominal load max. Q [kg] 2600 4000
The integrated guide rail attachment on the upper beam is
Nominal speed v [m/s] ≤ 4,0 ≤ 2,5
available for the car frame FleCS F2, in combination with the
Mass braked max. mges [kg] 4615 8490
rope pulley diameter Ø 320 mm, for the sliding guides L127/
Car width KB [mm] 900-2200 1270-3000 L217 and roller guide RTK100. Depending on the lift configu-
Car depth
KT [mm]
1000-3050
min. 1250 (P2000 MR1, P3000)/ ration, a smaller shaft head can be realised with this option.
min. 1600 (P4000), max. 3500
Car height KH [mm] 2000-2700 2000-3000
Type P2000 MR1 (Q≤2000 kg), P3000 (Q≤3000 kg),

Car P1000 (Q≤1000 kg), P4000 (Q≤4000 kg) Integrated guidel rail: sliding guide (left), roller guide (right)
P4000 (Q≤4000 kg)
Car inside micrometre FKSTM [mm] 950-2250 1270-3210
Rope suspension 1:1 (without rope pulley ) l l
2:1 (with 1/2 rope pulley) ¡/¡ ¡/¡ Rope pulley insulation (for F2/F4)
3:1 (with 2 rope pulley) – ¡ Rope pulley in the upper beam can be designed with rope
4:1 (with 2 rope pulley) – ¡ pulley insulation. Two versions are available:
Car insulation bottom l l • Pulley shaft bearing-supported with ultra-bushes in the
Car attachment top (present/insulated) l/l l/¡
upper beam
Rope pulley insulation ¡ ¡
• Pulley supports bearing-supported with spring elements in
the upper beam
Car frame weight (1)
mFR [kg] 189-436 387-693
Progressive safety gear in downward direction Type l (6071/0, …/1, …/2) l (6071/0, …/1, …/2, …/3)2)
Braking system in upward direction Type ¡ (6071/0, …/1, …/2) ¡ (6071/1, …/2) Rope pulley insulation: ultra-bushes (left), spring elements (right)
Governor pick-up (distance from centre guide rails) [mm] 200/250 200/250/300/350/400
Sliding guides Type L127 / L217 / ETN FK4 L180
roller guides Type RTK100 / WRG150 RT18 / WRG150 / WRG200-FK

Car insulation (for F2/F4)
Attachment for chain guides ¡ ¡
FleCS car frames are delivered as standard with car insulati-
Attachment for balance ropes ¡ (in v>2,5 m/s) –
on. Helical compression springs and dampers ensure elastic
l Standard, ¡ Option, – unavailable. mounting of the car in the frame. The type, number and
1) Car frame weight without grippers, guide rails, chain guides and rope pulley. You can receive an exact value on request taking the lift configuration into account.. arrangement of the springs (at the bottom, on the car floor)
2) No braking system is technically possible with safety gear / 3. and dampers (at the top, for the car ceiling) vary depending
on the nominal load and car weight.
Technical description • Overload measuring equipment accord- ding to EN 81-20

• Car frame consisting of multiply canted ing to EN 81-20, Triggered at nominal load • Guide rails at top integrated in frame Car insulation
sheet metal profiles, screwed elements + 10 % • Lift cable attachment
• Surfaces • Compensation-/balance chain attachment
• Galvanised elements (upper-/lower Options • Balance rope attachment (for v > 2.5 m/s)
Braking system (for F2/F4)
beam, side beams) are not painted • Pulley sheaves for suspension 2:1, atta- • Maintenance lock according to EN 81-20
FleCS car frames are delivered as standard with a progres-
• other parts with powder coating, Colourched to upper beam • Without car insulation for cargo cars
sive safety gear integrated in the car frame for the downward
similar to RAL 7005 (mouse grey), Poly-
• Governor pick-up extended to direction. A braking system for the downward direction is
ester epoxide mixed powder with layer 250/300/350/400 mm, required for roller optionally available. Synchronisation between the left and
thickness approx. 60 µm guides right side is ensured via a sophisticated bar linkage for both
• side beams in the centre screwed together
• Safety switch in explosion-protected de- systems. The systems are monitored in each case by two
sign independent switches. The safety catch, braking system and
Scope of delivery • Rope pulley insulation in upper beam with synchronisation bar linkage are integrated in the lower beam.
• Complete frame with screw connections elastomer springs
and attachments • Braking system in upward direction accor- Lower beam with braking system

Car Sling Counterweight
FleCS F2/F4 GTK 700/1050/1370

Variants The variable solution for many installation situations
Car Sling
Counterweight
with with integrated with with integrated
Sliding guide Pulley guide
braking system guide on top braking system guide on top
without rope pulley
with 1 rope pulley
with 1 rope pulley, insulated
GTK 700/1050/1370
• Product description 128
• Special Versions 129
with 2 rope pulleys
with 2 rope pulleys, insulated

Counterweight Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370 GTK 700/1050/1370

Product Description Special Versions
For a counterweight mass of up to 6460 kg in various versions

Counterweight
Counterweight
The counterweight frames High Safety
calculated for an overall mass Drawing for 2:1 Counterweight Mass
up to 6240 kg (special fillers). The following approximated values do include
The various necessary widths, the masses of the counterweight frame, the
gauges between rails and Quick and Easy hitch plate or the rope pulley, one or two buffer
suspensions (1:1 and 2:1) are Assembly
plates and the sliding guides:
available in the modular sys- GTK 700/135: 159 kg, 1:1 suspension;
Governor rope anchorange,
tem: top beam Variable Filling 187 kg, 2:1 suspension;
GTK 1050/135: 184 kg, 1:1 suspension;
Optimum adjustment to your 211 kg, 2:1 suspension;
installation GTK 1050/200: 210 kg, 1:1 suspension;
With the variations in length, 287 kg, 2:1 suspension;
width and gauge between rails, GTK 1370/270: 374 kg, 1:1 suspension;
the counterweight is an optimum 422 kg, 2:1 suspension.
fit for the most diverse project
planning dimensions. In the stan- Colour
dard versions, the counterweight The products shown are available in mouse-
frames with rope attachment for grey - RAL 7005 - as standard and with zinc
1:1 arrangement or rope pulleys coated parts.
are available for 2:1 arrange- Great Stability
ment. Besides the standard The variable gauges are:
gauge between rails of 700, 1050 • GTK 700/135: 612 ≤ gauge ≤ 700 mm
and 1370 mm, other clearance Optimal Adjustment • GTK 1050/135/200: 701 ≤ gauge ≤ 1050 mm
dimensions can be produced as to Your Lift • GTK 1370/270: 1051 ≤ gauge ≤ 1370 mm
well. •
Counterweight frames GTK Special Versions
Additional options • Roller guides
Various special versions such EN81-1, adjusted to the mass of the shaft. • Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension fixed
as sliding and pulley guides, the counterweight, is available in in a pulley carrier on the top beam
and a safety gear on the coun- the program. High level of safety • Progressive safety gears
terweight can be selected. For The frame construction of angu- (type 0, 1 and 2)
aesthetic purposes, the counter- Variable filling lar sheet metal profiles in the top • Buffer plates additionally
weight can be encased in a glass The two lengths for a multilayer and bottom beams and rein- • Panelling of counterweight on one or
shaft. Diverse accessories for filling with max. 30 or 40 levels forced knot junctions and their on both sides
the mounting of compensation (a layer is 60 mm) and various connections were calculated and • Compensation chain or compensation
chains and compensating ropes filler materials such as Gusso- optimised with the Finite Element rope mounting
are selectable. The path cover in lith, steel and lead allow variable Method (FEM), whereby the
the pit area in compliance with adjustment to the dimensions of necessary proofs of solidity were
also provided.
Counterweight (CW) GTK - Data table 2:1 Filler materials

Width of CW [mm] Total Mass [kg]1 Pulleys [mm] • Steel
GTK 700 135 ≤ 1650 360 • Gussolith
GTK 1050 135 ≤ 2435 360 • Concrete
GTK 1050 200 ≤ 3630 450 / 540 • Lead
GTK 1370 270 ≤ 6240 540
Total Mass (filler+frame)
1

Safety Gears
Own Notes Progressive safety/Braking system
Safety Gears
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 6071
Product description 132
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Safety Gears Safety Gears
6071 EN 81- 6071

Product Description 20/ -50
-conform Product Description
Betriebsanleitung Technik
Safety Gears
Safety Gears
Bremsfangvorrichtung/Bremseinrichtung 6071
The safety device can be deployed 4 Technik Item Designation Item Designation
as a progressive safety gear or 1 Jaw body 2 Seal wire
braking device. They are 2 iden- 4.1 Abmessungen 3 Seal 4 Threaded bolts
tical components but turned in 5 Counter wedge 6 Fork element
Maßtabelle Fangzange
their installation position by 180°, 7 Guide plate 8 Stop bolt
and depending on how they are Rechtsausführung Linksausführung 9 Guide bracket 10 Flat countersunk nib bolt
11 Safety gear roller 12 Limit stop
deployed they have a set braking
13 Grip wedge 14 Compression spring
or gripping force.
15 Spacer sleeve 16 Split pin
In everyday language, the safety

17 Slotted nut 18 Spring plate
device is also referred to as a jaw.
19 Mounting borehole 20 Name plate
Functional description

In the event of overspeed, the safety
gear rope connected with the grip
wedge on the safety gear frame is

blocked. The grip wedge is held in
place while the elevator car continues
to move. A transport roller in the grip Abb. 4.1-1
wedge draws the grip wedge in the with rated load at the guide rails and • Operating mode (dry, oiled) 2
direction opposing the moving direc- to hold it there (this also applies in
g
tion of the elevator car on a chamfer Distinction by deployment accor-
the event of failure of the suspension h
on the jaw body between the rail and gear). ding to the application
jaw body. In doing so, it expands the Safety device / progressive safety
The regulations of EN 81-20/-50 are 1
spring range of the jaw body. Item Designation
to be adhered to. gear (AFV) for safety gear operation
f
1 Rail blade thickness
The jamming effect of the jaw body is downwards.
2 Guide blade width
configured in such a way that the fric-Safety device with function as bra- Progressive safety gears are type
e
tional forces between the grip wedge, king system (ABV) approved safety devices with type k
i
counter wedge and rail decelerate the On the elevator car, a safety braking approval marking and CE marking l m
device is prescribed that takes effect in accordance with EN 81-1:98.
elevator car to a standstill. The jaw is n
released by moving the elevator car in the upward direction as a protec- The progressive safety gear on the Bezeichnung
Pos. Type a b c Pos. dBezeichnung
e f g h i k l m n
in the opposite direction. Here, the tion device against overspeed for elevator car may only take effect in 1 Schienenkopfdicke
0, 1 50 64 31 2 106 Schienenkopfbreite
~ 70 81 15 179 13 Ø 22 4 170 192
jaw body slips back over the chamfer the elevator car moving upwards. On a downward direction and must be Abb. 4.1-2 2 50 64 31 106 70 94 15 179 13 22 4 170 192
on the counter wedge until the coun- reaching the tripping speed on the able to brake the loaded elevator car Typ a b 3c d 60 e 82f g40 h 132 i k85 l 138 m 20
n 216 16,5 28 11,5 195 233
ter wedge is pressed by the return speed governor, this must be able to from the tripping speed of the speed 0, 1 50 64 31 106 ~ 70 81 15 179 13 Ø 22 4 170 192
spring into its initial situation and thus 2 50 64 31 106 ~ 70 94 15 179 13 Ø 22 4 170 192
brake the empty elevator car at the governor and hold it in place.
3 60 82 40 132 ~ 85 138 20 216 16,5 Ø 28 11,5 195 233
releases the rail. guide rails. BFV_6071_14_de
The regulations of EN 81-20/-50 are In country-specific certifications you Tab. 4.1-1 Assignment of the safety devices to the rail blade thickness
Safety device with function as pro- to be adhered to. hesitate to contact us..
gressive safety gear (AFV) Type 6071/
ThyssenKrupp Aufzugswerke Rail blade
22 thickness [mm] Version 09/2014
Part number
Safety gear Braking System
On the elevator car and when re- Distinction by construction size
quired on the counterweight, a safety In ascending order according to 0 9 - 16 60 710 59 03 0 60 710 63 03 0
braking system is prescribed that power output (0, 1, 2, 3), corre- 1 9 - 16 60 710 60 03 0 60 710 64 03 0
takes effect in the downward direction sponding to the characteristics: 2 9 - 19 60 710 61 03 0 60 710 65 03 0
as a safety device against the risk • Mass of car and load 3 16 - 35 60 710 62 03 0 60 710 66 03 0
of falling. On reaching the tripping • Speed
speed on the speed governor, this • Guide rail dimension and surface
must be able to brake the elevator car (drawn, machined)

Overspeed Governor
Own Notes GBTK 6023, 6023F, 6024 and Accessories
Overspeed Governor
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ GBTK 6023 136

GBTK 6023 F 138
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
GBTK 6024 300S 139
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Governor tensioning weight D200/D300 140
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Overspeed Governor Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 EN 81- EN 81- GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50

20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
Technical data
Pulley diameter D mm 300 250* Inductive sensor for monitoring
the plunger position
Rated speed vrated m/s 2.5 2.0

Magnet 12V
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13 0.5 - 2.6 100 % duty cycle
*with test groove diameter 170 mm

Rocker
Safety contact Blocking device - Blockable
- optional rocker without voltage
Standard version as shown side on

Options: Safety contact with pre-
switching and electrical reset
- optional
- Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage)
- Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage)
- Bracket with final limit switch OFF
- Many other functions on request Technical data
vN ≤ 2,5 m/s vN ≤ 2,5 m/s
Pulley diameter D mm 300
FHmax= 175 m
Rated speed vrated m/s ≤ 2.5
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. Max. engaging time of magnet ms 39
with EN 81‑20. Max. total travel mm 310
1 2 3 4
GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50 compliant

Version by EN 81-20/-50 EX Explosion proved
and EX version
11
10
9
7
8 vN= 1,0 m/s
Technical data
1 Cam disc 7 Lever with rubber ring and locking plate
2 Governor pulley 8 Locking position switch
Rated speed vrated m/s 1.0
3 Captive-type adjusting screw 9 Limit stop
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with Tripping speed vT m/s 1.2 - 1.3
4 Cast-on lug 10 Latch on rocker EN 81‑20. Max. engaging time of magnet ms 39
5 Cap spring 11 Non-locking position switch The EX evaluation of this component is conducted within the
Max. total travel mm 310
framework of the overall EX evaluation of the installation.
6 Pulley with rubber ring on rocker

GBTK 6023 F EN 81- EN 81- GBTK 6024 300S

20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
Standard version with electrical remote reset
- Hardened groove (wear-resistant) vN = 2,00 - 4,00 m/s
- Finish-wired and tested
- Connections to system plug connector
- Specially developed for MRL installations
Options: 300S: 379 mm
- Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage)
- Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage)
- Many other functions on request
Technical data
Rope diameter d mm 6.5
Rated speed vrated m/s ≤ 1.6
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.7 - 2.09
300
S: 4
88 m
m
View with encoder mounting,

left-hand version 300S: 102 mm
GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50 compliant version

- Left- / right-hand version available
Technical data
- Encoder mounting optional
Type 300S
Pulley diameter D with 8 mm Drako 300T mm 304
Axle load FA max N 12.000
Rated speed vrated m/s 2,0 - 8,0
Inductive sensor for monitoring
the plunger position Tripping speed vT m/s 2,35 - 10,5
Magnet 12V Braking force FB N 400 - 2100
100 % duty cycle
Blocking device -
Blockable rocker
without voltage
Rocker
Safety contact 11
- optional
12 1 Cover for encoder 7 Rope slip-off guard
10
Safety switch with pre-
switching
2 Shaft cover 8 Cam, downwards
and electrical reset 9
Connection for Tripping wheel for
1 3 9
encoder rope brake
2 8
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device Bracket with integrated final limit switch OFF 3 7 4 Type plate 10
Tripping wheel for
pre-switching
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. 6
with EN 81‑20. 5 Electr. connection 11 Cover plate
4 6 Cam, upwards 12 Governor pulley
Max. engaging time of magnet 40 ms

Max. total travel 205 mm
Technical details as for above version

5

Governor tensioning weight D200 Governor tensioning weight D300

Accessories Accessories
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
Technical data Technical data
Tension force 500 N Tension force 648 N / 870 N
Governor rope diameter 6.5 mm Governor rope diameter 6.5 mm / 8.0 mm
Governor tensioning pulley D=200/ 6.5-PA Governor tensioning pulley D=300: 6.5-PA / 8.0-PA
Rated speed vrated ≤ 1.6 m/s Rated speed vrated ≤ 2.5 m/s
Travel height, TH ≤ 100 m Travel height, TH ≤ 175 m
Type of protection, rope Type of protection, rope IP 67
IP 54 (optional IP67)
breaking switch breaking switch or EEx d IIc T6
right
Rope engagement point Rope engagement point (back
40 mm 40 mm
(back of rail) of rail)
Distance X T89 / T125 / T140-1 /

T70 T89 / T90 T125 / T127 Rail width T70
T90 T127 T140-2
Guide rail
150 mm ● --- --- ---
150 mm ● --- ---
- Easy to install thanks to individual attached Distance X 200 mm ● ● ● ---
200 mm ● ● ● weight plates
250 mm ● ● ● ---
250 mm ● ● ●
Distance X 300 mm --- --- ● ●
with exten- 350 mm --- --- ● ●
- Galvanised sheet metal design
sion 400 mm --- --- ● ●
- Mounting in left- and right-hand versions possible
→ On-site modification possible!
- Bracket for mounting the overspeed governor to the guide
rail available

Buffer
Own Notes Oil and Lift Buffers
Buffer
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Oil Buffers 01 - 03 144

Oil Buffers 04 - 05 145
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Lift Buffers 146
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Buffer Uprights 148
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Buffer Buffer
Oil Buffers O1 - O3 EN 81- EN 81- Oil Buffers O4 - O5

20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
Buffer
Buffer Buffer
Lift Buffer EN 81- EN 81- Lift Buffer

20/ -50
-conform
20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
Buffer
D0 D1 D2 D3 D5
The profile of properties
• excellent damping characteristics

• high volume compressibility with manimal transverse expansion
• wide range of permissible loads
• good resistance to ozone as well as ultraviolet and energyrich radiation
• temperature range -30°C bis +80°C
• hydrolysis resistant
• all current fixing variants available
Lift buffers - Version Type A

D0 D1 D2 D3 D5
Height H [mm] 80 80 80 80 80
Active buffer height h [mm] 76 74 74 74 74
Buffer diameter D [mm] 80 100 100 125 165
S (+1.0) [mm] 4 6
Max. rated speed v [m/s] 1,0
Loads kg
P+Q (min-max) 0.63 [m/s] 150 - 1200 200 - 1500 250 - 3200 500 - 5200 600 - 7500
1.0 [m/s] 180 - 600 220 - 700 330 - 1250 600 – 1850 650 - 2700
Material number 6021 000 9222 6021 000 9223 6021 000 9224 6021 000 9225 6021 000 9226

Buffer Uprights Buffer Uprights
Buffer Uprights Telescopic Buffer Uprights

Buffer
Buffer
12
Telescopic Buffer Upright

Buffer Upright 530 Buffer Upright 930
Heights 330 mm - 530 mm 570 mm - 930 mm
Adjustable Range 200 mm (40mm-steps) 360 mm (45mm-steps)
Steel thickness 4 mm 4 mm
Part No. 6010 000 9403 6010 000 9400
• maximum load: 2600 kg (each buffer upright)

• speeds of up to max. 1 m/s
• suitable for spring buffer P2 and P1
Part number. Type Spring buffer perm. Oil bufer perm. d in mm Mounting advantage
Q+P 2600 kg L Q+P 3020kg L
6010 000 9441 FK 715<L≤1115 315<L≤815 82.5
The height can be adjusted to the shaft pit
6010 000 9440 GG 715<L≤1115 315<L≤815 82.5
60 100 45 56 0 FK 73<L≤715 73<L≤315 76.1
• to compensate tolerances
60 100 46 56 0 GG 73<L≤715 73<L≤315 76.1
• to adjust the height when speed has changed

Guides
Own Notes Roller Guides and Sliding Guides
Guides
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Roller Guides ARO D60 / RTK 100 152

Roller Guides RT 18 / RTK 300 153
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Roller Guides WRG 154
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Sliding Guides I, PUR I, Eco, Ultramid, PUR II 156
Sliding Guides II, Nylon, Aclamid, GG-25I / II 158
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Lubricators for Sliding Guides 160
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Guides Guides
Roller Guides Roller Guides

ARO D60 / RTK 100 RT 18 / RTK 300
Guides
Guides
AR0 D60 RTK 100 Roller Guide RT 18 RTK 300
Roller Guide Car (FK) & Roller Guide Roller Guide
Counterweight (GG) Counterweight (GG) Car (FK) Car (FK)
Roller Guide AR0 D60 Roller Guide RTK 100 Roller GuideRT 18 Roller Guide RTK 300
6073078010 60730002940 6073008010 60730002079
Speed vn max. -> FK --- Speed vn max. -> FK 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 3,0 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 10 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 2,5 m/s Speed vn max. -> GG 3,0 m/s Speed vn max. -> GG --- Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 - 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 9 - 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 // 19 // 28,6
Counterweight Force G [kN] 35 Conterweight Force G [kN] 50 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2500 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 3000
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 1250 // 1350 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 800 Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
depends on spring
calibrationg
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 500 // 600

Guides Guides
Roller Guides Roller Guides

WRG WRG
Guides
Guides
WRG 125
Roller Guide WRG 150
Car (FK) Roller Guide WRG 200
Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG) Roller Guide
Car (FK)
WRG Roller Guides

WRG 80 WRG 100 WRG 125 WRG 150 WRG 200
60730009208 60730009209 60730009210 60730009206 60730009211
Speed vn max. -> FK --- --- --- 3,5 m/s 5,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 2,5 m/s 3,5 m/s 7,0 m/s 7,0 m/s ---
9 9 9 16 16
Width of the guide blade SKB [mm]
16 16 16 19 19
Counterweight Force G [N] 100 100 100 100 ---
Guiding Force Pstat [N] --- --- --- 3000 3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] --- --- --- 900 900
Dimensions
A [mm] 80 100 125 150 200
B [mm] 126 143,5 151 200 250
C [mm] 175 150 150 220 220
D [mm] 200 228 266 300+SKB 555

Guides Guides
Sliding Guides I Sliding Guides I

PUR I, Eco Ultramid, PUR II
Guides
Guides
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Sliding Guide:
Eco Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)
Ultramid
Sliding Guide: Counterweight (GG)

Sliding Guide: Car (FK)
PUR I
PUR II
Sliding Guides PUR I Sliding Guides Eco Sliding Guides Ultramid Sliding Guides PUR II
6073073010 60730009222 60730009204 6073069010 6073063010 6073027010 6073066010
Speed vn max. -> FK --- Speed vn max. -> FK 1,0 m/s 1,0 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK --- 1,75 m/s 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> GG --- --- Speed vn max. -> GG 3,5 m/s 3,5 m/s --- Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 9 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 9 16 Width of tguide blade SKB [mm] 16
Counterweight Force G [kN 20 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 1700 1700 Counter Weight Force G [kN] 50 100 --- Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 600 600 Guiding Force Pstat [N] --- 1700 1700 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 800
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] --- 600 600

Guides Guides
Sliding Guides II Sliding Guides II

Nylon, Aclamid GG-25I, GG25 II
Guides
Guides
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Sliding Guide: Car (FK)
Nylon Aclamid GG-25 II
06240 13242
a 205 280
b 250 480
c 200 400
l 280 300
n 92 130
Sliding Guide Nylon Sliding Guide Aclamid Sliding Guide GG-25 II

6073047010* 6073046010 6073068010 6073206240 6073213242
Speed vn max. -> FK 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 2,0 // 2,5 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 1,0 // 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 0,63 m/s 0,63 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 28,6
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2500 // 2000 2500 // 2000 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 6000 // 5000 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 18000 34000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 1000 // 800 1000 // 800 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 3000 // 2500 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 7000 13000
* inkl. Befestigungsteile für Schmierapparat 60 740 04 01 0

Guides Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides Lubricators for Sliding Guides

Guides
Guides
Lubricator
60740009201 Lubricator
for Sliding Guides 6074004010
PUR I 6073073010 for Sliding Guides
Ultramid 6073069010 Nylon 6073046010
Ultramid 6073063010 Nylon 6073047010
Ultramid 6073027010 GG-25 I 6073214240
GG-25 II 6073213242 GG-25 II 6073206240
Sliding Guide Car Lubricator AK10 Oil drip receptacle (SKB = 5-16 mm)
With guide shoe HSM 6074009010 60160006205
6073208250 For sliding guide car
And Aclathan inserts
6073217240 (9 mm)
6073216240 (16 mm)
(Mounting on bottom beam)
OPTIONAL:
Mounting elbow for mounting the
lubricator AK10 above/below the
car sling 60748902980
(Lubricator AK10 is available for
every type of sliding guide)
Sliding Guide
6073208250 (Guide shoe)
inkl. insert
Speed vn max. -> FK 0,5 - 2,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB
5-16
[mm]

Rope Pulleys
Own Notes Rope Pulleys and Accessories
Rope Pulleys
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys 164

Accessories 165
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Rope Pulleys Rope Pulleys
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys Accessories

Roller bearings
Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys
• Highest precision and smoothness
• Extremely resilient
• Extremely attractive price / performance
ratio
Axles for Rope Pulleys
Axle1 Ø-Axle Length Part number

X 147 mm 6072 000 9240
Y 182 mm 6072 000 9234
Z 200 mm 6250 000 0058
D [mm] Ropes z*Ø RA [mm] Bp35 [mm] Axle Bearing Type Part number 0 111 mm 6072 000 8541
150 7x6 12 110 X 6310 2RS 6072 000 9255 1 50 mm 166 mm 60 723 53 32 0
150 10x6 12 145 Y 6310 2RS 6072 000 9229 2 135 mm 6072 000 3604
150 12x6 10 145 Y 6310 2RS 6072 000 9265 3.0 190 mm 60 723 34 32 0
2401 12x6 10 132 Z 6310 2RS 6250 000 0057 3.1 240 mm 60 723 50 32 0
2601 6*6,5 11 82 0 6310 2RS 6072 000 7798 4 132 mm 60 723 37 32 0
3201 8*8 14 130 1 NSK 6310 6072 000 9341 216 mm 60 723 35 32 0
5 60 mm
3601 7*8 14 127 1 6310 2RS 60 720 76 42 0 240 mm 60 723 51 32 0
360 7*8 15 118 2 6310 2RS 6072 000 3603 6 230 mm 60 723 47 32 0
80 mm
360 7*8 18 140 3 6310 2RS 60 720 54 42 0 7 260 mm 60 723 32 32 0
3602 7*8 18 140 3 NJ 310 E 60 720 60 42 0 8 90 mm 305 mm 6072 000 0981
3603 z*d - 140 3 6310 2RS 60 720 71 42 0 9 120 mm 310 mm 6072 000 0980
3604 z*d - 140 3 NJ 310 E 60 720 71 42 0
1)
relevant axle-numers see page before
400 4*10 18 90 4 6310 2RS 60 720 67 42 0

4001 8*10 18 163 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 9342 Axle Brackes
4501 7*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 4885
For Rope Pulley Part number
4501 7*10 20 160 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 4884
Ø 240 mm 40x3x65 6250 000 0059
450 7*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 68 42 0
Ø 360 mm 00 981 03 61 0
450 7*10 20 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 55 42 0
Ø 400 mm 00 981 03 61 0
4502 7*10 20 160 5 NJ 312 E 60 720 62 42 0
Ø 450 mm 00 981 03 61 0
450 8*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 58 42 0
Ø 540 mm 00 981 04 61 0
4503 z*d - 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 72 42 0
Ø 640 mm 00 981 04 61 0
4504 z*d - 160 5 NJ 312 E 60 720 72 42 0
Ø 740 mm 00 981 05 61 0
540 7*8 18 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 69 42 0
540 7*13 20,5 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 65 42 0
5402 7*13 20,5 160 6 NJ 216 E 60 720 44 42 0 Pedestal Bearing for Deflection Pulley Fixed on Concrete Foundation (including axle)
5403 z*d - 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 73 42 0
For Axle Part number
5404 z*d - 160 6 NJ 216 E 60 720 73 42 0
3 61 720 07 25 0
540 8*13 20,5 190 7 6216 2RSR 60 720 66 42 0
5 61 720 08 25 0
5402 8*13 20,5 190 7 NJ 216 E 60 720 59 42 0
6 60 720 64 25 2
5403 z*d - 190 7 6216 2RSR 60 720 73 42 0
8 60 720 65 25 2
5404 z*d - 190 7 NJ 216 E 60 720 73 42 0
6404 z*d - 240 8 NJ 2218 6072 000 0984
7404 z*d - 240 9 NJ 224 6072 000 0976
Specialty: 1Polyamide-pulley, 2High load, 3Variabele*, 4Variabele* and High load, 5Overall width of rope pulley, incl. bearing
*Variabele with grooves (z), groove diameter (d), groove distance (RA) .

Comfort Door
Own Notes S8A / K8A
Doors
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Product Benefits 168

General Notes 169
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Landing Door S8A 170
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Car Door K8A 171
Project planning 172
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - surfaces 174
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - fire protection 175
Glass Doors 176
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Door Sills 178
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Door safety lock system 179
F9 Door Drive 180
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Technical Information 181
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Special versions 182

Structure of the landing door 184
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Layout of the car door 185
Modernisation for Door Drive F9 187
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Comfort Door Comfort Door
S8A / K8A EN 81- S8A / K8A

Product Benefits 20/ -50
-conform General Notes
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Design Flexibility Range of application Fire protection safety standards
Panelling in numerous surface designs, Very wide and finely graded range of The S8A / K8A comfort elevator doors are The landing doors are fire-tested in line
glass door panels, aluminium and stain- options for door dimensions, with door used in passenger and freight elevators with DIN EN 81-58 with regard to fire resis-
less-steel door sills and surrounding in- widths from 700 to 2500 mm and door with high standards with regard to quiet tance. This means the door can be used in
visible sill guides enable individual adap- heights from 2000 to 2500 mm running, handling capacity and comfort. the majority of export markets if fire protec-
tation to the design requirements in the One-side opening, double-panel tele- Door type M2T, opening to the left tion safety standards are required for the
building scopic door (M2T) for optimum door The 2-panel, side-opening telescopic landing doors.
width in a narrow shaft sliding door (M2T) is used mainly in pas- DIN EN 81-58 is included in building regu-
Safety Centre-opening, double-panel door senger elevators to achieve a door width lations list A, part 1 of the German Institute
Compliance with currently valid EU (M2Z) for short door running times and that is as large as possible in relation to for Building Technology. This means that
standards EN 81-20/-50 and national high handling capacity the shaft width. the landing doors with this fire resistance
Door type M2T, opening to the right
safety regulations Centre-opening, four-panel telescopic test can be deployed in Germany.
High-quality door safety lock systems door (M4TZ) for maximum door widths The 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door
and short door reversal times for the with good utilisation of space (M2Z) is conceived for passenger elevators The S8A landing doors in the correspond-
safety of passengers and to protect the Comprehensive range of options and with a short door running time and high ing special version (SA) also comply with
technology against damage special versions for individual adaptation handling capacity. other fire protection requirements such as
BS476 (GB) and GOST (RU-UKR).
Efficiency Innovation Door type M2Z, centre-opening The 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic The S8A glass doors are not available with
Time-saving installation resulting from Optimum utilisation of space and short sliding door (M4TZ) is mainly used in pas- a fire protection safety standard and are
clever, installation-friendly mounting so- floor-to-floor distances possible as a senger and freight elevators with a high therefore not suitable for the partitioning of
S8A M2Z, stainless steel, leather surface
lutions for short downtimes result of compact design of the door handling capacity and large door widths fire-protected zones.
Short door opening and closing times header with small shaft dimensions.
reduce waiting periods and increase the Stable, single-leaf landing door panels
Door type M4TZ, centre-opening
handling capacity of the installation in sandwich design with low weight and Compliance with special requirements
without weld seams Planning recommendation The comprehensive range of options
Comfort Elevators should be planned in such a way (SA – special versions) means the door is
Low noise of ≤ 55 dB(A), measured one Reliability that they can also be used without difficulty suitable for deployment with special
metre in front of the landing door Safe and robust mechanical construction by elderly and disabled persons. The mini- requirements consisting of special
Excellent smooth running properties and with powerful door drive mum dimensions for elevator doors stipu- standards and regulations, for example in
isolation from structure-borne sound as a Long service life as a result of the exclu- lated in the standard DIN 18040 (formerly accordance with
result of mounts protected from vibration sive deployment of proven and tested DIN 18024/18025) for barrier-free con- EN 81-70 Accessibility of elevators for
on the elevator car (SA 79) materials and components struction are 900 mm door width and persons, including disabled persons
Harmonious and smooth door move- Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare 2000 mm door height. DIN EN 81-71 Protective measures
ments as a result of frequency-controlled parts availability In the case of modernisation measures, against wilful destruction (vandalism),
door drive with adjustable running char- these minimum dimensions should be categories 0 or 1 only after consultation
acteristic curves complied with, circumstances in the build- DIN EN 81-72 Fire service elevators
Mounting of the suspension gear with wall plugs ing permitting.
Scope of Supply Noise
Doors complete with required fasten- The noise characteristics of the door de-
ing material, basic body of the door pend on the door dimensions, door panel-
sill, guide rail profile of the door sill and ling, installation conditions and door run-
toeguards ning times. At a distance of 1 metre to the
Rasterising of the door height and door   landing door, an airborne noise level of
widths in increments of 50 mm possible S8A M2T, glass door with frame, stainless steel ≤ 55 dB(A) can be assumed.
grain 220
(SA 20);
with door type M4TZ with DW ≥ 1400 SA – special version
mm in increments of 100 mm
SA – special version Mounting of the base door sill support Securing bracket with large adjustable ranges
 for anchor rails  with wall plug fixture (SA 38)

S8A Landing Door K8A Car Door

Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Door panels Door panels
The door panels are single-leaf, manufac- The structure of the door panels with the
tured using noise-inhibiting sandwich door panel guides corresponds to the high-
design and offer outstanding corrosion quality technical designs described for the
protection. The basic body consists of landing door. In the case of elevator car
2 mm galvanised steel plate and is either doors, on the other hand, no door panels
laminated with 0.6 mm galvanised steel with fire protection safety standards and
plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. heat insulation are deployed.
Powder coating of the galvanised version is
also possible. Door drive
The lower door panel guide in the door sill The door drive that is used is a high-
for each door panel consists of two adjust- qality, gearless and frequency-controlled
able sliders. Rubber buffers are fitted to the asynchronous motor with integrate control
closing edge to buffer impacts and reduce device. The power transmission to the door
noise. panels is low-noise by means of a belt
In the case of landing doors that lead drive
out-doors, we recommend the use of door that is highly resistant to wear. The machine
panels clad with stainless steel. is very compact and does not protrude
In the case of fire resistant doors with beyond the projection area of the suspen-
heat insulation criterion, the door panels sion gear. It is mounted on the suspension
are filled with an additional technical heat gear of the car door and protected from
insu-lation. vibration.
Door frame Door mounting

The sheet metal casing of the suspension
The door frame comprises: gear of the car door is bolted directly onto
the upper suspension gear made of the car roof using brackets. Mounting that
folded 2.5 mm galvanised steel plate; is protected from vibration is available as
the side door posts made of folded an option (SA 79). The elevator car can be
1.5 mm galvanised steel plate; up to 300 mm higher than the door height
and the lower door sill made of folded (optionally up to 500 mm, SA 40). The car
2 mm galvanised steel plate with bolted- door portal is not included in the scope of
on aluminium or stainless steel profile delivery of the car door.
S8A M2Z, hook lock with contacts Suspension gear with stable,
profiled guide rail
The landing doors are coupled by means
of a widening cam fastened to the car door.
This is operated and moved by the toothed
Flooring belt of the machine.
The customer-fitted flooring can be laid
directly up to the outer door panel facing The type of protection for the entire door
the hallway. is IP20. An IP54 version is available as an
Even more elegance is created with the option (SA 13).
door sill with surrounding guide of the
door panels (SA 18): the flooring can be
SA – special version
laid up to the shaft edge. The same possi- Mounting of the suspension gear on the elevator car
Non-insulated mounting using a number of brackets
bility applies to the car door (SA 18). directly with the car roof.
Insulated mounting (SA 79) with rubber insulation to
Precisely adjustable gap of the door panels Sill with encompassing guide (SA 18) reduce the transmission of vibrations to the car roof.
to one another
170
S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Project Planning Project Planning
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening) Installation options for the landing doors
68
(150 with SA 27) Detail A (M2T/M4TZ) Detail A (M2Z)
85
CDT
≥ 30 + BT 1,5 x DW
TB ++25
25 CDT
≥ 30 + BT FFL FFL 125
UFL UFL ≤6
(1,5 x DW + 45 for SA 18) ≤6 ≤6
OFF OFF
ORF ORF OFF OFF
ORF ORF Door architrave
40 36
40 36 34 Türzarge
Door architrave
DH DW 700 - 750 800 - 850 900 - 1400
40 x 40
40 x 40
2000 • • • SD SD (SA 19)
(SA 19)
140
ST FFL
ST ST ST OFF
6
FFL
OFF
• • •
6
2100
295
2200 • • •
72
72
125
100
100
100
100
2300 • •
190
Sill profile
CDT
Schwellenprofil
Sill profile
• •
300
BT
300
2400
Basic body Grundkörper
Basic body
2500 •
(STWH min. = DH + 450 for SA 12)
(STWH min. = DH + 450 for SA 12)

DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
DW M16
SA 12)
SA 12)
125 TB 125
TH min.= TH 450 bei SA 12)
min.= TH 450 bei SA 12)

M16
Mounting bracket Mounting bracket
Befestigungswinkel
STWH min. = TH + 590
STWH min. = TH + 590

1,5 x DW
TB ++50
20
590
590
Toeguard Toeguard
Schürze
STWH min. = DH + 590
STWH min. = DH + 590

TH +bei
TH +bei
= TH=450
= TH=450
Detail B (M2T/M4TZ) Detail B (M2Z)
STWH min.min.
STWH min.min.
85
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening) 125 ≤6
≤6 ≤6 40 36
Door architrave
Türzarge
Door architrave 40 36 34
DH
DH
(STWH
(STWH
TH
(STWH
(STWH
TH
TH
40 x 40
40 x 40 (SA 19)
(SA 19)
FFL
OFF
6
FFL
≥≥30
30++CDT 22xxDW
TB + 50 ≥ 30 + CDT
BT OFF
6
BT
72
72
90
90
DH DW 700 - 750 800 - 850 900 - 1400
190
190
Recess Sill profile
Sill profile Nische Schwellenprofil
2000 • • •
85 120
Basic body
Basic body Grundkörper
235
2100 • • •
90
90
• • •
M16
2200 Mounting bracket M16
Befestigungswinkel
Mounting bracket
CDT
• •
BT
2300 Toeguard Toeguard

Schürze
2400 • • A A B B
125 DW
TB 125 2500 • Recess
22xxDW DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
TB + 100
Installation in the shaft Installation in recess / in the landing

Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening) The landing doors are fastened to the shaft In the interest of economical utilisation of If your requirements or wishes go beyond
wall by means of brackets. The brackets space, the landing door can be installed in the range of options described, please
are secured to the wall optionally with wall a recess. Recesses with greater depth are contact our experienced sales team.
≥≥
3030+ +CDT
BT 1,5
1,5 xx DW
TB ++ 50
50 ≥ 30 + CDT
BT plugs or with securing bolts on anchor rails possible as an option (SA 60).
(1,5 x DW + 70 with DW < 900 mm)
(measurement in concrete in line with CEN/ The different recess depths are specified in
DH DW 800 - 950 1000 - 1150 1200 - 1350 1400 - 1500 1800 - 2500 TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the the table below.
2000 • • • • • shaft wall or welded onto a shaft scaffold.
125 140
295
2100 • • • • •
2200 • • • •
2300 • • •
BT
CDT
Recess depth
2400 • •
125 DW
TB 125
2500 • Without recess With recess With deep recess
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 up to DW ≤ 1400 mm. Door type
1,5
1,5 xx DW
TB ++ 100
100 SA 11 Standard SA 60
M2T S8A 0 mm 55 mm 100 mm
M2Z S8A 0 mm 20 mm 60 mm
All mass in mm; DH – door height, DW – door width; CDT – construction dimension tolerance / deflection from plumb (± 25 mm); SA – special version M4TZ S8A 0 mm 55 mm 100 mm
All mass in mm; DH – door height; STWH – floor height; SD – shaft depth; UFL – unfinished floor level;
FFL – finished floor level; SA – special version
172
S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – surfaces Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – fire protection
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Door panels
Surface versions Doors with fire protection safety stan-
The door panels of the landing and eleva- dards
tor car doors consist of 2 mm galvanised The standard versions of the landing doors
steel plate and are clad either with 0.6 mm comply with the requirements of the type
galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm approval in accordance with EN 81-20/-50.
stain- In addition to this, other criteria in line with
less steel plate. For the galvanised version, in part country-specific guidelines and
an additional powder coating is also pos- Door panel, front / visible side Door panel, back
regu-
sible. lations such as EN 81-58, BS 476 and
The same applies to the surface versions GOST apply to the special fire protection
for the door frames and front walls of the versions.
Door panel with fire protection safety standards
elevator shaft. (back)
Standard version Stainless steel
Standard version
Electrolytically galvanised steel plate sur- Fire protection classifications M2T M2Z M4TZ
faces for painting on site. for S8A landing door
Electrolytically galvanised steel DW 700 – 1400 mm DW 800 – 2500 mm

surface Leather / stainless steel
DH 2000 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
E120 EN 81-58 Standard
galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
Painting Painting DW 700 – 1400 mm DW 800 – 2000 mm
Different types of painting are possible with DH 2000 – 2200 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
EW30 EN 81-58 SA 104
a high-quality powder coating method galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
(60 μm):
Basic colour shade Mouse Grey
RAL 7005 / powder coating DW 700 – 1100 mm DW 800 – 1100 mm
Linen / stainless steel EW60 EN 81-58 SA 105 DH 2000 – 2200 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
Traffic White RAL 9016 / panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
powder coating Mouse Grey RAL 9016 /
powder coating
White Aluminium RAL 9006 /
DW 700 – 1400 mm DW 800 – 1400 mm DW 800 – 2500 mm
powder coating DH 2000 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
EI60 EN 81-58 SA 106
Colour RAL / powder coating galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
Rhombus / stainless steel,
ferritic or austenitic, DW 700 – 1400 mm
only available for landing door DH 2000 – 2500 mm
EI120 EN 81-58 SA 109 - -
Traffic White RAL 9016 / galvanised, powder coated,
powder coating panelled with stainless steel
Stainless steel
DW 700 – 1400 mm DW 1400 – 2500 mm
Panelling with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate: GOST DH 2000 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
EI120 SA 101
Leather / stainless steel (RU and UKR) galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
Linen / stainless steel panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
Rhombus / stainless steel,

Grain 220 / stainless steel, DW 700 – 1400 mm DW 800 – 2500 mm
ferritic or austenitic, ferritic DH 2000 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
White Aluminium RAL 9006 / 2h-Integrity BS 476 SA 100
only available for landing door powder coating galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic

DW 700 – 1400 mm
GOST DH 2000 – 2500 mm
E30 SA 100 -
(only RU) galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel
Colour RAL / Grain 220 / stainless steel, Not all combinations of door height / door width are available; details on request.
powder coating austenitic SA – special version
Other versions available on request.
174
S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Glass Doors Glass Doors
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Glass door panels Glass door panels with available dimensions
The S8A / K8A comfort glass door panels
Door width Door width
are designed with a surrounding door panel
frame on all sides at a width of 50 mm. Frame glass door panels (SA 31) Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
Fully glazed door panels are also available 50 TH [mm] TB [mm]
TH [mm] TB [mm]
on request (SA 41).
50
50
2000 700 - 1400 2000 700 - 1200
100
2100 700 - 1400 2100 700 - 1200
Door height
Door height
The glass door panel frames have a basic 2200 700 - 1300 2200 700 - 1150
coating and can be given any surface finish 2300 800 - 1300 2300 800 - 1100
which is available for sheet metal door 50
2400 800 - 1300 2400 800 - 1050
6 mm
panels. The glass panes are fitted flush
50
6 mm
2500 900 - 1300 2500 900 - 1000
with the door panel frame. The glass panes DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
optionally in the grid of 50 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
are made of composite safety glass (TVG
Closing edge Closing edge
50
and VSG-V) and are transparent.
The gap between the glass door panel and Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
door post or portal is limited to a maximum
of 4 mm to safeguard against the danger of Glass door panels with frame (SA 31) Fully glazed door panels (SA 41)
Door width Door width
children's hands being drawn in.
Frame glass door panels (SA 31) Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
TH [mm] TB [mm] TH [mm] TB [mm]

In the case of the centre-opening doors 50
2000 700 - 1200
(M2Z, M4TZ), the closing edge is optionally 2000 700 - 1400
50
50
2100 700 - 1400 2100 700 - 1200
designed as a 25-mm-wide frame (SA 33),
Door height
Door height
2200 700 - 1300 2200 700 - 1150
so that the closed door visually has a frame
2300 800 - 1300 2300 800 - 1100
width of 50 mm at the closing edge. The
2400 800 - 1300 2400 800 - 1050
other three sides of the frame have also a
1)
2x25
2500 900 - 1000
6 mm
2500 900 - 1200
6 mm
width of 50 mm, giving the door an even 2x50
2)
more elegant appearance. DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
optionally in the grid of 50 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
50
In the case of glass doors, we recommend Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side,
50
optional optional
for reasons of visual appearance that the
light grid be mounted as stationary on the Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
car door at the end of the running rail and
at the end of the guide rail profile.
Door width Frame glass door panels (SA 31) Door width
On glass door panels, the cam elbows of
50
TH [mm] TB [mm] Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
the widening cam of the elevator car door 50 2000 1300 - 2500 TH [mm] TB [mm]
protrude into the visible area. If this is not 2100 1300 - 2500
50
2000 1400 - 2200
visible, a shortened version of the widen- 100 2200 1300 - 2500
Door height
2100 1400 - 2200
Door height
ing cam (SA 30) can be selected. On this 2300 1300 - 2500 2200 1400 - 2200
version, however, levelling with opening 2400 1400 - 2400 2300 1600 - 2200
1)
doors is not possible. 2x25 2500 1600 - 2300 2400 1600 - 2100
6 mm
6 mm
2) DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
2x50 optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
2500 1800 - 2000
Foe door sill without visible guide DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
(SA 18) as of DW ≥ 1400 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
50
50
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
1) For glass door panels (SA 31), combined with narrow frame (SA 33). 2) For glass door panels (SA 31). Edge protection with width 15 mm available as an option for solid glass doors (SA 47).
SA – special version. All specified dimensions in mm.

S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Door Sills Door Safety Lock System
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Door sills Door safety lock systems convenient for systems according to EN
The basic body of the shaft door sill is The doors can be equipped with different, 81-70.
made of angled steel plate. As default, sill opto-electronic systems for door safety:
profiles made of aluminium with permit- High-resolution light grid (Standard) Even more comfort is provided by a high-
ted wheel loads of 280 kg are mounted. High-resolution 3D light grid with motion resolution light grid with integrated motion
Alongside these, stainless steel door sills detection system (SA 45) detection system (SA 45).The closing
for 500 kg (SA 15) and 1500 kg (SA 16) Motion detection system (SA 25) operation of the door then reversed when
wheel loads are also available. The systems are always equipped with the persons or objects approach the door. This
electronic evaluation unit required in each light grid cannot be used for glass doors.
case.
The standard high-resolution light grid is Even more comfort is provided by a high-
a no-contact opto-electronic door safety resolution light grid with integrated motion
system. Transmitter and receiver units are detection system (SA 45). The closing
integrated in the door panels. Between the operation of the door then reversed when
two, a light grid is created up to a height persons or objects approach the door. This
of 200 cm; this has 36 parallel and 174 light grid cannot be used for glass doors.
crossed light beams. Interrupting one or
more of the light beams triggers reversing In addition, a facility for monitoring the area
of the door drive. The device works with in front of the door with body heat detection
Aluminium door sill Stainless steel door sill invisible alternating light in the infrared can be installed in the car door portal (SA
for permitted wheel loads up to 280 kg for permitted wheel loads up to 500 kg, range. Thanks to the high sensivity it is also 25). Only rapid changes in temperature are
as standard version profiled stainless steel guide (SA 15) detected, which means that changes in the
Standard light grid
ambient temperature or stationary persons
have no influence on the system.
Wheel load QRL on

the door still
Distance
between
wheels a
Monitoring ranges of the high-resolution light grid with

Door width DW integrated motion detection system (SA 45)
Max. wheel
Max. overall sill load
Door sill load
QRL a < 400 mm a ≥ 400 mm
Aluminium
(standard)
280 kg 280 kg 560 kg Stainless steel door sill (only for M4TZ) Door sill with surrounding guide
Stainless for permitted wheel loads up to 1,500 kg, the flooring can be laid up to the shaft edge
500 kg 500 kg 1000 kg
steel (SA 15) solid stainless steel profile (SA 16) (SA 18);
Stainless optionally with flat stainless steel profile
1500 kg 1500 kg 3000 kg
steel (SA 16)
(SA 17)
Surrounding
500 kg 500 kg 1000 kg
guide (SA 18)
DW – door width, QRL – wheel load, SA – special version High-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection Monitoring range of the motion detection system SA – special version
a – distance between wheels. system (SA 45) (SA 25)

S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

F9 Door Drive Technical Information
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
F9 door drive Technical details
The F9 door drive is a compact unit con-
sisting of a gearless, frequency-controlled M2T M2Z M4TZ
S8A landing door / K8A car door
asynchronous motor with integrate control
device. It is mounted vertically and pro-
Permitted dimensions for steel plate doors 1)
tected from vibration on the suspension
Door width DW [mm] 700 – 1400 / 100 mm grid 800 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
gear of the car door. A horizontal arrange-
ment is possible as an option. Door height DH [mm] 2000 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
Materials for steel plate doors
A high-resolution encoder supplies the Suspension gear Steel plate 2.5 mm, galvanised
drive with all the necessary information with Door posts Steel plate 1.5 mm, galvanised
regard to position and speed of the door Basic body: folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Door sill
panels at all times. This means that no limit Guide rail profile: made of aluminium or stainless steel (SA), bolted on
switches are required to detect the door Structure: single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design
position. Basic body: folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Door panels Panelling: steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised or
The power transmission to the door panels stainless steel plate 0.8 mm or
is linear and low-noise by means of a belt steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised with powder coating
drive that is highly resistant to wear. The Additional features / functions Running characteristic curve setting / pa- K8A car door (technical details for selected combinations of door width x door height)
door panels of the landing door are moved Automatic commissioning as well as and rameterisation
Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 700 x 2000 - 2200 700 x 2000 - 2200 800 x 2000 - 2100
by a widening cam without play. functional test, including automatic learn- The control system electronics calculate Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 2.00 / 2.50 1.70 / 2.20 1.90 / 2.40
ing of door mass, closing force limitation the running characteristic curve depend- Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 107 / 111 / 157 106 / 110 / 154 134 / 139 / -
Automatic commissioning takes place via a of 150 N, limitation of kinetic energy, ing on the path travelled. Step-on area [m2] 0.056 0.056 0.064
convenient teach-in function. door width, opening direction, running The running characteristic curve con- Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 800 x 2000 - 2400 800 x 2000 - 2400 900 x 2000 - 2100
characteristic curve generation for door tains a special profile for operation of the Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 2.30 / 2.80 1.80 / 2.30 1.90 / 2.40
At high ambient temperatures, the motor movement. door cam by the door drive. Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
and control device can be placed in sepa- Approaching a detected obstacle: if All the parameters of the running charac- Step-on area [m2] 0.064 0.064 0.072
rate units (on request). the door strikes an obstacle on closing teristic curve for opening, closing, Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 900 x 2000 - 2500 900 x 2000 - 2500 1100 x 2000 - 2200
that was not detected by the light grid nudging and reopening can be defined Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 2.60 / 3.10 1.90 / 2.40 2.00 / 2.50
(e.g. due to a stone in the door sill), it is independently. Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
re-opened. The previously determined Learning the maximum possible closing Step-on area [m2] 0.072 0.072 0.088
Technical description rise in force causes the door drive to force (moment teach-in). Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 1000 x 2000 - 2500 1000 x 2000 - 2500 1200 x 2000 - 2300
Motor: six-pole asynchronous motor deceler-ate in the next closing operation Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 2.80 / 3.30 2.00 / 2.50 2.00 / 2.50
Control device: integrate frequency even be-fore the position of the obsta- Running characteristic curves (over time t) Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
inverter, clock frequency 16 kHz, V/f cle. Conse-quently, there is a significant Step-on area [m2] 0.080 0.080 0.096
1
characteristic reduction in the levelling speed. If no 1
Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 1100 x 2000 - 2500 1100 x 2000 - 2500 1400 x 2000 - 2400
6
Type of protection: IP54 other obstacle is detected, the door drive 6
2
Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 3.10 / 3.60 2.20 / 2.70 2.20 / 2.70
2
EMC: in accordance with EN 12015/16 accelerates again to normal speed after Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 148 / 155 / 222 147 / 154 / 221 194 / 202 / 304
5
Interfaces: 24 V logic level, potential reopening to the position of the obstacle. 5 3 3 Step-on area [m2] 0.088 0.088 0.112
separation, programmable special output Partial opening: after reopening, the 4 4 Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 1200 x 2000 - 2500 1200 x 2000 - 2500 1800 x 2000 - 2500
on opening on closing
Parameterisation: via PC opening width of the door can be re- Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 3.30 / 3.90 2.50 / 3.00 2.60 / 3.10
Diagnosis: event stack duced if desired. Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 158 / 165 / 233 157 / 164 / 232 233 / 244 / 398
 Maximum speed v
Step-on area [m2] 0.096 0.096 0.144
Connection voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz The door drive has an event stack that  Deceleration
 Approach speed Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 1400 x 2000 - 2500 1400 x 2000 - 2500 2500 x 2000 - 2500
Ambient conditions stores errors and warnings in non-  Widening cam operation (can be deactivated) Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 3.90 / 4.50 3.00 / 3.50 3.80 / 4.30
– 10 °C to + 50 °C volatile form with date and time.  Widening cam speed
Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 178 / 186 / - 177 / 185 / - 304 / 318 / -
Dimensions: (as of flange area) Other activation options, see operating  Acceleration
Step-on area [m2] 0.112 0.112 0.200
W x H x D = 260 x 200 x 115 mm manual.
Available combinations of door width / door height, see page 6. Available combinations of door width / door height for landing doors with fire protection safety standard, see page 9.
1)
Available combinations of door width / door height for glass doors, see page 10. Door dimensions (DW and DH) optional (SA 20) in the 50 mm grid, available as option with door type
M4TZ up to DW 1400 mm. For door types M2T and M2Z, operating and indicator elements are only possible in the door frame up to DW 1300 mm. 2) The opening and closing speeds
can be adjusted separately from each other. The specified values are the default settings where the noise development is ≤ 55 dB(A) and the door has very good running proper-ties. 3)
Weight determination of car door with the following equipment: galvanised = door panels covered with 0.6 mm galvanised steel sheet, without special equipment; stainless steel = door
panels covered with 0.8 mm stainless steel, without special equipment; glass = glass door panels (SA 31 / frame door panels with 0.8 mm stainless steel panelling or SA 41 / fully glazed
door panels), with special version 79 / insulated suspension gear mounting and insulated supports).

S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Special Versions Special Versions
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Special versions Special versions
K8A car
Special S8A landing Special S8A landing K8A car
door Description Description
versions door versions door door
SA 4 • - Display "No Entry" complying with DIN EN 81-73 SA 55 • • Double-leaf door panels
SA 5 • - Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for indicator elements SA 56 • - Labyrinth at the closing edge, only in conjunction with SA 55 and only for M2Z and M4TZ
SA 6 • - Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for control elements SA 57 • - Recess in the door post for cover plate, not for M2Z with front wall of the elevator shaft
SA 7 • - Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for control elements; key switch not possible with M2Z and M4TZ SA 60 • - Deep recess of 100 mm (M2T, M4TZ) or 60 mm (M2Z), for aluminium door sill with permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 280 kg
SA 8 • - Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for indicator elements SA 65 • - Additional switch mounting for monitoring, protection type IP20
SA 11 • - Door installed in shaft without recess SA 67 • - Version without shaft door toeguard; a clamping bracket is used instead
SA 12 • - Low height between floors STWH up to min. DH + 450 mm SA 69 • - Cam mounting for SA 27 in conjunction with an elevator car door of another generation
SA 13 • • Type of protection IP 54 (example of use: for door leading outdoor) SA 71 • - Door suitable for instal. complying with DIN EN 81-71, (available from conversion to DIN EN 81-20/-50)
SA 14 • - EX version (ATEX), explosion-proof version SA 74 • - Hook lock with weight (version for example for China), available for M4TZ as of DW ≥ 1400 mm
SA 15 • • Stainless steel sill profile, profiled, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 500 kg SA 75 • - Monitoring of emergency unlocking, scanning, only with M2T
SA 16 • • Stainless steel sill profile, solid, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 1,500 kg, door sill cast in, only available for M4TZ SA 79 - • Insulated car installation, suspension gear on elevator car and supporting bracket with insulation element
SA 17 • • Stainless steel profile for SA 18, if flooring us not to go all the way to the sill edge SA 100 • - Fire protection class 2-h-Integrity complying with BS 476 (GB) and E30 complying with GOST (RU)
SA 18 • • Door sill with surrounding guide of door panels, floor covering thickness up to 40 mm Fire protection class EI60 complying with GOST for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus.
Fire protection class EI120 complying with GOST for Ukraine.
SA 19 • - Profile between the door posts; material: aluminium or stainless steel SA 101 • • Special version for Russia is available only in combination with SA 55 (in this case not possible with powder coating).
SA 20 • • Door dimensions in the 50 mm grid for door width (DW) and door height (DH), on M4TZ only up to DW ≤ 1400 mm Special version for Belarus is available only for door types M2T and M2Z.
SA 21 • • Sill heating only in conjunction with door sill SA 18 SA 104 • - Fire protection class E120, EW30 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 24 - • Intermediate profile for control panel in the recess, only available with insulated mounting (SA 79) SA 105 • - Fire protection class E120, EW60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 25 - • Motion detection system with infrared sensor, deployment in addition to a light grid, installation in the car door portal SA 106 • - Fire protection class EI60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 27 • • Mechanical car door lock complying with DIN EN 81-1/2, if distance between shaft wall and car door sill > 150 mm SA 109 • - Fire protection class EI120 complying with DIN EN 81-58, door width DW = 800-1400 mm and door height DH = 2000-2700 mm
SA 30 - • Short widening cam for panoramic elevators, cam base plate / cam bracket not visible, levelling with opening doors not possible
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
SA 31 • • Glass door panels with surrounding door panel frame width of 50 mm, flush-fitted glass panel, stationary mounting of light grid
SA 32 • - Mounting in the shaft scaffold with M 16 screw, without anchor rails and without wall plugs
SA 33 • • Glass door panels with door panel frame width at the closing edge of 25 mm, available for M2Z and M4TZ
SA 34 • - Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side and door posts
SA 35 • - Gap cover for plastering
SA 37 • - Rubber strip at closing edge
SA 38 • - Wall plug fixture
SA 39 • • Halogen-free cables for landing and elevator car door
SA 40 - • Mount for 300 mm < (car height – door height) ≤ 500 mm
SA 41 • • Fully glazed door panels
SA 42 • - Widened toeguard, up to outer edge of the suspension gear (suspension gear width)
SA 43 • - Panelling for the entire suspension gear sheet metal casing, for glass shaft
SA 44 • • S8A: delivery device, special toeguard of bottom landing door; K8A: folding toe guard
SA 45 - • High-resolution 3D light grid (height up to 1800 mm) with integrate motion detection system (door width up to 1900 mm)
SA 47 • • Protection of closing edge for solid glass doors, U-profile made of stainless steel
SA 49 • - Widened toeguard up to outer edge of the door posts (width of door post)
SA 51 • - Monitoring of emergency unlocking, locking, only with M2T
SA 52 • - Type of protection IP x3 / fire service elevator
SA 53 • - Additional lock for second, faster door panel on M2Z and M4TZ
SA 54 • • Vision panel in acc. with sample high-rise guideline and EN 81-1, no fire protection with EN 81-58 included
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.

S8A / K8A S8A / K8A

Structure of the Landing Door Layout of the Car Door
Doors
Türen
Doors
Türen
Suspension gear Suspension gear
Shaft securing bracket, Door drive motor with control device,

to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs F9
Door post mounting, Car installation, rigid

secured with wall plugs or insulated (SA 79, not shown)
Carriage V-groove belt
Hook lock, Toothed belt

landing door lock (optional)
Carriage
Sheet metal casing
Widening cam
Running rail
Sheet metal casing
Opening post
Running rail
Door panels
Supporting bracket
Closing edge door post (SA 79, not shown)
Basic body of shaft door sill, Door panels

made of steel plate
Light grids
Guide rail profile,
made of aluminium or stainless steel Basic body of car door sill,
made of steel plate
Shaft securing bracket,
to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Guide rail profile,
made of aluminium or stainless steel
Lower door panel guides
Insulation for supporting bracket
Shaft door toeguard (SA 79, not shown)
Lower door panel guides
Car door toeguard

(not shown)

Door Drive
Own Notes Modernisation for Door Drive F9
Doors
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
■ gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor drive ■ programmable special output (virtual switch, clo-
■ quiet operation sing force limitation, additional end positions
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ■ maintenance-free and compact unit of motor and controller signal)
■ Controller with clock frequency of 16 kHZ ■ Power limitation according to EN81
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ■ high-resolution shaft encoder ■ Diagnostics and Parameterisation automatically
■ high car heights or via Laptop
■ vibration-free drive ■ Mains voltage: 230V (+10% / -15%) AC voltage,
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ■ Protection type IP54 50/60Hz signal voltage
■ Door width 700-2500 mm ■ ambient temperature range: -10°C to + 50°C
■ after reserving, the width that opens the door ■ relative humidity max. 70%
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ can be reduced if desired ■ EMV tested according to EN12015/16
■ 24V logic level
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Door-Modernisation Kits:
■ The modernisation solution has been specially designed for the different doors
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ■ Transmission from the drive to the door through a belt
■ The modernisationkits are independent from the doorwidth, as they can be adjusted on site
■ No necessity for limit switches
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Haushahn, TSS72K:
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ This modernisation kit consists of a
console that can be adjusted accor-
ding to the door width and a special
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ cam that fits to the old door.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Thyssen, M2TD4:
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ This Modernisation Kit consists of the doordrive F9
which replaces the old telescopic arm by the belt.
Furthermore it has a console that can be adjusted
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ according to the existing door width and an instruction
manual with drawings.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Thyssen, M3TK/2:

With this solution the old doordrive is
replaced by the F9 door drive with a
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ belt.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Thyssen, M2Z/ M2T/ M4TZ (D1,G1,D2,W1,W2,W3,W7):

This Modernisation Kit consists of the F9 door motor, a simple
bracket that fits to the above listed old door drives and a drawing
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ for the installation.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Further Modernisation Kits are available for:

Schindler QKS6/QKS8/QKS9/QKS11
For more type of doors that can be modernised, please do not hesitate to contact our sales team.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

LEMoS®
Own Notes LEMoS®

The Modular Modernisation Solution
Modernisation
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • Variable modernisation cabin
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • 320 - 1050 kg
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ • Configurable in millimeter increments

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Flexible adaptation of various door
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
manufacturers
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ System advantages 190

System advantages / Elevator car P450SV/ 191
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ P1000SV
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Modernisation 192

Project planning and performance data 196
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Project planning data (without dual entrance) 203
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Project planning data (with dual entrance) 204
Project planning data (door mountings) 205
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Technical Data 207
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Elevator Car Design 208
Car Design Options 210
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Lighting system 211
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

LEMoS® LEMoS®
System Advantages System Advantages / Elevator Car P450SV/P1000SV

Modernisation
Modernisation
Flexible degree of modernisation Optimisation possibilities System perspective  Improved comfort and design with of
With LEMoS, you can individually mod- The LEMoS elevator system is specially The existing installation is adapted using space utilisation
ernise by using single components in your tailored to the high, individual requirements state of the art technology to provide the  Reusing as many non-value existing
elevator installation or perform a complete in modernisation. very best technical solution within the components as possible, such as rails,
modernisation. The limits are fluid. framework of a modernisation. counterweight and possibly door frame,
Regardless of which aspects are important i. e. dust-free conversion and a reduction
What is special about this system is that to you during modernisation, with LEMoS The customers requirements with regard to of costs to the customer.
you can also leave parts in your installation you can optimise and combine them with his installation and compliance with all cur-  Rapid conversion and short down times
for which replacement would not be techni- one another unlike with any other system. rent regulations are also considered during
cally necessary or make economic sense. planning, project implementation. Scope of supply and performance
This flexibility is unique and carves out a We will work together with you to find the  Project planning base on the existing
distinct place for LEMoS! optimal solution for your elevator installa- For a comprehensive modernisation the shaft dimensions provide the best shaft
LEMoS opens the possibility of a dust-free tion, individually tailored to your require- elevator car component is of central impor- utilisation thanks to variable elevator car
conversion process and shortening of the ments and wishes. tance. Important aspects here are: dimensions
conversion time.  Modular modernisation in various stages
LEMoS can provide all the mechanical as an option
components that can be combined with any  Safety requirements in acc. with EN81-20  Drive technology, safety components,
control systems available on the market.  Requirements from the German regula- elevator car, doors as per customer
tion for operational safety of machinery requirements, shaft equipment (rails,
 Requirements in acc. with EN 81-70 bracket, counterweight)
Flexibility in the drive solution regarding access for persons with dis-
At LEMoS we use cutting-edge drive solu- abilities
tions which are matched to the particular  Energy efficiency in acc. with VDI 4707  Combination with any control systems
requirements in modernisation. The opti-  Sound insulation requirements and operating and elements available on
mum solution for your installation is chosen the market
from a wide range of gearless and geared
drives to suit the application. The elevator car, flexible for modernisation
In modernisation there are many constraints that must be taken into consideration in the complex planning of a lift modernisation. From
the customer perspective the elevator car is one of the main visible components that must satisfy the requirements with regard to size –
disability friendly requirements and design.
With the P450SV and P1000SV elevator car series we offer an elevator car that is flexible and adaptable to modernisation needs. The
elevator car is a self-supporting construction with integrated car sling for 1:1 suspension.
The shaft width and depth dimensions can be adapted in millimetre increments to the existing site conditions ensuring all available area is
used. Different elevator car heights are available, together with doors of different manufacturers.
LEMoS with gearless drive LEMoS with geared drive As a result of planning the shaft cross-section we can prepared the offer precisely meeting the customers needs.
Energy efficiency All components used by LEMoS are de- Innovation Efficiency Variability
With the flexible LEMoS system, you can – signed so that your modernised installation Specially developed for modernisation Self-supporting elevator car without car From the basic model (galvanised
depending on the scope of the modernised achieves high levels of energy efficiency in Enlarged elevator car thanks to optimum sling with 1:1 suspension elevator car) to individual full equipment
components – considerably improve energy accordance with VDI 4707. shaft utilisation Compact and variable elevator car specification – everything is possible
of your installation with LEMoS
Increase the energy efficiency
efficiency compared to your existing instal- Variable concept with flexible width, Largest possible available car floor area Large number of interfaces (e.g. doors
lation. You can thereby make a considerable depth and height dimensions Elevator car configurable in millimetre of different manufacturers)
You can make significant savings for exam- contribution to the reduction of ongoing op- Integrated ventilation slots in the increments Different materials possible
ple with the use of standby operation mode erating and energy costs and the lowering car front wall Reliability Environment
or by using frequency inverters with energy of CO2 emissions. Flexible door mountings Strict quality inspection ensures high Energy-efficient production with cutting-
recovery capability. Fast and simple assembly (thanks to quality of all installed components edge manufacturing technologies
Modern LED lighting also increases your integrated positioning aids) Guarantee of the long term supply of Use of recyclable materials
energy savings. Adaptable off-centre suspension during spare parts Optimised use of materials
assembly (for subsequent alignment of Reduced down times and faults Energy-saving LED lighting
the installed elevator car in the shaft)

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements

Modernisation
Modernisation
Space optimisation Budget optimisation Scope of modernisation
(degree of modernisation) Modernisation of all required
'Step by Step' modernisation components in one step
Older elevator installations frequently have
smaller car dimensions which fail to meet Depending on scope, the modernisation of
today's demands for comfort and legal your elevator installation may represent a
requirements. In existing buildings you can- larger investment. If you prefer to spread
not however, change the shaft dimensions. these costs over several budget periods
or years, we can prepare a modernisation
With the LEMoS system, we offer you the plan work within your budget. This takes
unique possibility to make better use of the into account both the technical necessities Modular modernisation of individual
existing shaft and use the largest possible as well as your budget. components spread over a longer
elevator car. period of time
The modernisation of individual com-
The new, self-supporting elevator car has ponents then takes place over a longer Period of time 1 Period of time 2 Period of time 3 Time / budget
(e.g. 1st year) (e.g. 2nd year) (e.g. 3rd year) periods
a compact, load-bearing structure and period of time, spread over several stages.
can be adjusted to fit the existing shaft in The down time is, of course, kept to a
millimetre increments. In addition, space- All measures serve to offer the passengers With the flexible LEMoS system you can if minimum during the work. Between the
optimised shaft equipment and doors with a more spacious elevator car and to improve you wish naturally use your existing eleva- individual stages of the modernisation, you The scope and features of the individual ensures that all components go together
reduced depth can be used. the handling capacity of the installation. tor car or retain the car dimensions. will always have available a safe and fully modernisation packets can be freely se- perfectly. When all measures have been
Older people and people with disabilities will, functional elevator installation. lected and can be adapted to the available completed, you get a modernised elevator
in particular, be very much appreciate the budget. The matched LEMoS system that represents the latest state of the art
additional freedom of movement. equipment.
Cost optimisation
Investment costs Optimisation of the conversion time
Services provided by the customer
In the development of the LEMoS system, for adapting to the requirements of
a "less flexible" new installation Demand-based, modular
we have placed special emphasis on the During extensive modernisation, down
modernisation with LEMoS
aspect of economic efficiency in moderni- times of your elevator installation cannot
sation. This applies both to the investment Reduction in be completely avoided. With the LEMoS
for the modernisation itself as well as to the investment costs system, we can, however, keep this to a
ongoing running costs. Demand-based
minimum with concern for the passengers. Conversion time = down time
Modernisation as component
complete replacement of
The LEMoS components have such flexible modernisation Parts of the system which are exposed to Modernisation as
the entire installation with LEMoS complete replacement
interfaces that all parts which are ex- minimal wear or which would require con- Conversion time = down time of the entire installation
posed to little wear and do not need to be siderable time to replace, such as the shaft
replaced, such are for example guide rails equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight),
and counterweights. can be integrated in your modernised
This reduces the modernisation costs as elevator and continue to be used due to the
well as the installation time. Parts of the high flexibility of the components. Time
shaft equipment, landing doors or door

frames can frequently be re used. Compared to a complete replacement,
this eliminates time-intensive and costly
The LEMoS components represent the lat- The ongoing operating expenses are signifi- measures. In addition, with the modular A shortened conversion time and fewer
est state of the art equipment and manu- cantly reduced. LEMoS system, we can prepare a phased measures performed by the customer
facturing techniques. They are optimised modernisation schedule for you in which also reduce stress for the building tenants
for long service life and low power con- the modernisation measures are performed caused by noise and dirt. Less additional
sumption. during times of low use. work is necessary for adapting the doors on
the landing.

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements Modernisation according to Individual Requirements

Modernisation
Modernisation
Control system Landing and car door
-
Our components are tested with all - Reduction of door operating times
the control systems available on the - Increase in safety level
market - Designed to accommodate disabled
- Energy efficiency options such as passengers by means of light grid
standby and sleep mode can be - Increase in installation availability
activated in our components - Modern, attractive appearance
- Doors with different door mounting
dimensions
Drive and control
- Very smooth running

- Reduction of operating costs
through energy savings Elevator car
- Increase in safety level
- Maximum efficiency Maximization of car dimensions
-
- Energy recovery optional possible
- Increase in the rated load possible
- Modern, attractive design
- Positive effect on image & increase
in building value
Safety technology
- Increase in the safety level to the Lighting

current state of the art
- Fulfilment of the obligations of the - Design possibilities through light
installation operator for a relaxing atmosphere
- Reliable increase in the availability - Energy- and cost-saving
of the installation LED lighting
- Integrable emergency light function
- Long working life, considerably
reduced maintenance expenses
Shaft equipment
- Optimal utilisation of space in Operating and

the shaft indicator elements
- Larger dimensions of the elevator
car possible - The choice can be made with all
- Flexible components, such as the elements combinable for the
counterweight, rail bracket ... selected control system
- Reduction of running noise - Elderly- and disabled-friendly design
in acc. with EN 81-70
Pictured: Pictured:
- with gearless drive - with geared drive
in the machine room in the machine room

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight)
Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
Modernisation
Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1)
Shaft layout with side-opening door
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550
EC STM Speed v [m/s] 1.0
01
CWD Max. travel height TH [m] 40 25
Dual entrance No
WC3
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

Number of passengers 4 5 6 7
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 800 850
CW STM
steps) Max. CW [mm] 850 900 950 1000 1100 1150 1250 1350
1 Gearless / Geared Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1100 1200 1300 1350 1450 1500 1550 1650
CD
SD
Car height CH [mm] 2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm)
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 225 (for counterweight depth 100 mm)
WC2 [mm] 140 – 300
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
DD
Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1165 1215

Max. SW 2 [mm] 1375 1425 1475 1525 1625 1675 1775 1875
Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 3 [mm] 70
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
TH = 2000 – 2100 mm
R1 DW R2
Door packet thickness DD [mm] 155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)
WC1 1) CW WC2 1)
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1300
SW
Max. SD [mm] 1490 1590 1690 1740 1840 1890 1940 2040
Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 – 3570 (Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
FFL ORF Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150 / 1550 4
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2500 2450 2400 2200 2150 2100 2000 2000
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM [mm] CW + 40
Shaft layout with centre-opening door Rope clearance dimension RCD [mm] variable
EC STM Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 35.7 36.8 37.5 38.5 39.9 40.9 43.0 48.4
CWD
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 19.2 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.5 22.1 23.2 26.1
WC3
Installation eye in machine room E1 [kN] 5.0

Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 13.1 13.6 13.9 14.3 13.7 14.1 16.0 17.4
TH
CW STM
1)
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on
CD
Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are
SD
FFL ORF
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for
project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances).
Min. SP = 1150 mm
The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD =
800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CW x CD = 850 x 1150 - 1200 mm.
DD
R1 DW R2
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
WC1 1) CW WC2 1)
SW Car width = Shaft width – Wall clearance, left – Wall clearance, right
Machine room
CW = SW – WC1 – WC2
CW/2+CWD/2+85 mm Middle elevator car CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") – (C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) – (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
Max. CW = SW – 225 mm – 140 mm
Shaft pit
CW STM / 2 +145 mm
CW/2+60mm
R
dia. 200 CD dia. 80 Car width = Car gauge between rails – 2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW = CGBR – 2 x 20 mm
160-200 200
dia. 80
MRD = SD+600 mm
PGG
P9
SD
dia. 200 Without dual entrance

Ge
arl
es
s/ Car depth = Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – Rear wall clearance – Installation tolerance, door side
Ge
are
P7 P7 d CD = SD – DD – WC3 – IT
SD
CD = SD – (155 to 295 mm) – 70 mm – 25 mm

R1 - door recess, left PEC
R2 - door recess, right Max. CD = SD – 155 mm – 70 mm – 25 mm
P8
1)
The larger value is valid.
F or the values C1 and C2 IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left;
see table on Pages 17/18. R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
Pictured load points in the machine
SW
room for gearless drive.
SW MRW = SW+800 mm
196
LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight)
Modernisation
Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without / with dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1)
Shaft layout with side-opening door
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000 1050
R3 DW2 R4 Speed v [m/s] 1.0
1) 1)
(WC1) (WC2) 01 Max. travel height TH [m] 40
EC STM Dual entrance possible Yes/No Yes
CWD GGT
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

Bracket support Number of passengers 8 10 11 12 13 14
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 900 1000 1100
WC3
DD2
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1500 1600
CWD Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050 1150 1200 1300 1450
CW STM
EC STM Gearless / Geared steps) Max. CD [mm] 1750 2000 2100

CD
CD
SD
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2
CW STM
SD
WC2 [mm] 140 – 300

Shaft width Min. SW 3 [mm] 1295 1395 1495
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
Max. SW 3 [mm] 2130 2230
DD1
DD
Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 4 [mm] 70 (without dual entrance)
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
Shaft depth (without dual entrance) Min. SD [mm] 1300 1400 1450 1550 1700
R1 DW R2 R1 DW1 R2
1) 1) 1) 1) (without dual entrance) Max. SD [mm] 2140 2390 2490
WC1 CW WC2 WC1 CW WC2
(with dual entrance) Max. SD [mm] 2390 2640 2740
SW SW
Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
FFL ORF
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150
Shaft layout with centre-opening door 2750 2500 2200
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm]
R3 DW2 R4 Rope clearance dimension RCD [mm] variable
(WC1) 1) (WC2) 1) Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 63.9 68.2 70.9 73.6 77.4 on request
EC STM
CWD Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 34.4 36.7 38.2 39.7 41.7 on request
TH
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
WC3
Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 24.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 29.0 30.5
DD2
EC STM Load point in the shaft pit P8 [kN] 75.0 81.5 86.0 90.5 97.0 101.5
Load point in the shaft pit P9 [kN] 59.0 62.5 65.5 68.0 69.0 72.5
CW STM
CW STM
1)
CD
SD
ORF FFL FFL ORF

Pages 15/16. 2) Without dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1520 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). With dual entrance: WC1 =
CD
SD
255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1680 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). 3) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting
Min. SP = 1150 mm
CWD
shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending
on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 4) The horizontal, free clearance between outer
edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of
DD1
DD
20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
R1 DW R2 R1 DW1 R2
WC1 1) WC2 1) WC1 1)
CW WC2 1) = – –
CW Car width Shaft width Wall clearance, left Wall clearance, right
SW SW Machine room CW = SW – WC1 – WC2
CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") – (C2 - R2 + IT + "Luft")
CW/2 + CWD/2 + 160 mm (with bracket support)
Shaft pit CW/2 + CWD/2 + 85 mm CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) – (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
0 mm (with bracket support)
Middle elevator car Max. CW = SW – 255 mm – 140 mm

CW STM / 2 +145 mm
Car width = Car gauge between rails – 2 x distance from elevator car to rail
R CW/2+60mm
CW = CGBR – 2 x 20 mm
dia. 200 CD dia. 80
Without dual entrance
160-200 200
P9 PGG dia. 80
MRD = SD+600 mm
Car depth = Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – Rear wall clearance – Installation tolerance, door side IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door
SD
Prerequisites for version with dual entrance: dia. 200 CD = SD – DD – WC3 – IT dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in
Ge
arl shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess,
SD
P7 P7 Door recess dimension R1 or R2 >= 90 mm on main es

s/ CD = SD – (155 to 295 mm) – 70 mm – 25 mm
entrance side and R3 or R4 >= 90 mm on rear side; dual Ge
are
right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are
d Max. CD = SD – 155 mm – 70 mm – 25 mm included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2
entrance is not otherwise possible.
P8 R1 - door recess, left PEC With dual entrance and WC3.
R2 - door recess, right Car depth = Shaft depth – Thickness of door packet (1st entrance) – Thickness of door packet (2nd entrance) – 2 x installation tolerance, door sides
1)
The larger value is valid. CD = SD – DD (1st entrance) – DD (2nd entrance) – 2 x IT
F or the values C1 and C2
CD = SD – (155 to 295 mm) – (155 to 295 mm) – 2 x 25 mm
see table on Pages 17/18.
Pictured load points in the machine SW Max. CD = SD – 155 mm – 155 mm – 50 mm
SW
room for gearless drive. MRW = SW+800 mm
199
198

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight)
Modernisation
Modernisation
Shaft layout with side-opening door Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1)
EC STM 01 Rated load 1 Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550
CW STM Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

Max. travel height TH [m] 40 25
Dual entrance No
CWD
WC3
Number of passengers 4 5 6 7
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 800 850
Gearless / Geared
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1050 1100 1200 1300 1350 1400
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 850 950
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1100 1200 1300 1350 1450 1500 1550 1650
CD
SD
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1/WC2 [mm] 140 – 300
MIN. HR. = CH + 1320 mm

Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1080 1130
Max. SW 2 [mm] 1650 1700 1800 1900 1950 2000
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
Rear wall clearance WC3 3 [mm] 225 (for counterweight 100 mm)
DD
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1255 4 1355
R1 DW R2 Max. SD [mm] 1645 1745 1845 1895 1945 2045 2095 2195
WC11) CW WC2 1)
FFL ORF Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
SW
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150 / 1550 5
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2500 2450 2400 2200 2150 2100 2000 2000
Shaft layout with centre-opening door
EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD [mm] variable
CW STM
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 35.7 36.8 37.5 38.5 39.9 40.9 43.0 48.4
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 19.2 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.5 22.1 23.2 26.1
TH
CWD
WC3
OFF ORF 1)
CD
SD
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for
Min. SP = 1150 mm
project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installa-
tion tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) Smaller shaft depths are possible
on request and after the project planning has been technically reviewed. 5) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CD = 850 to 950 mm.
DD
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight

R1 DW R2
WC11) CW WC21)
Machine room (rope suspension 1:1)
SW
Car width = Shaft width – Wall clearance, left – Wall clearance, right
dia. 200
CW = SW – WC1 – WC2
Shaft pit
PGG CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") – (C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) – (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
RCD
dia. 80
CW/2+60 mm Max. CW = SW – 140 mm – 140 mm
160-200 200
dia. 80
MRD = SD+500 mm
dia. 200
SD
P9 Car width = Car gauge between rails – 2 x distance from elevator car to rail
PEC CW = CGBR – 2 x 20 mm
P7 P7 Gearless / Geared Without dual entrance

SD
Car depth = Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – Rear wall clearance – Installation tolerance, door side
R1 - door recess, left CD = SD – DD – WC3 – IT
P8
R2 - door recess, right = =
CD = SD – (155 to 295 mm) – 225 mm – 25 mm
1)
The larger value is valid.
F or the values C1 and C2 Max. CD = SD – 155 mm – 225 mm – 25 mm
see table on Pages 17/18.
Pictured load points in the machine SW
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left;
room for gearless drive. R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
MRW = SW+550 mm
SW

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Project Planning Data (without dual entrance)
Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1000 kg
Modernisation
Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) Rated load depending on car width and car depth
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000 Rated loads Car width CW [mm]
Speed v [m/s] 1.0 Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
Max. travel height TH [m] 40 850 320 350 350 375 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 500 525
Dual entrance No
900 320 350 350 375 400 400 425 450 450 475 500 525 550 575
Number of passengers 8 10 11 12 13
(in 1 mm 900 1000 1100 950 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 600
Car width Min. CW [mm]
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1500 1600 1000 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 630 650
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050 1150 1200 1300 1450 1050 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 630 630 675 700
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1750 2000 2100 1100 320 350 375 400 425 425 475 475 500 550 575 600 630 650 675 700 725
Car height CH [mm] 2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 1150 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 525 550 575 600 630 650 675 725 750 775
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2 1200 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 550 575 600 630 650 700 725 750 775 800
WC2 [mm] 140 – 300 1250 375 400 425 450 475 500 550 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850
Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1180 1280 1380 1300 400 425 450 475 500 525 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850 900
Max. SW 2 [mm] 2100 2200 1350 400 425 450 500 525 550 600 630 650 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 925
Rear wall clearance WC3 3 [mm] 255 (for counterweight 135 mm)
Car depth CD [mm]

1400 425 450 475 525 550 575 630 650 700 725 750 800 825 875 900 925 975
1450 425 475 500 550 575 630 650 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1000
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1485 1585 1635 1735 1885
1500 450 475 525 575 600 630 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975
Max. SD [mm] 2325 2575 2675
Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1550 475 500 550 600 630 675 700 750 775 825 850 900 925 975
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150 1600 475 525 575 600 650 700 725 775 800 850 900 925 975 1000
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2750 2500 1650 500 550 600 630 675 725 750 800 850 875 925 975 1000
1700 525 575 630 650 700 750 775 825 875 925 950 1000
Rope clearance dimension RCD [mm] variable
1750 550 600 630 675 725 775 825 850 900 950 1000
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 63.9 68.2 70.9 73.6 77.4
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 34.4 36.7 38.2 39.7 41.7 1800 575 600 650 700 750 800 850 875 925 975
Installation eye in machine room E1 [kN] 10.0 1850 575 630 675 725 775 825 875 925 950 1000
Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 24.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 29.0 1900 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 850 1000
Load point in the shaft pit P8 [kN] 75.0 81.5 86.0 90.5 97.0
1950 630 675 725 775 825 875 925 975
Load point in the shaft pit P9 [kN] 59.0 62.5 65.5 68.0 69.0
2000 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
1)
2050 675 725 775 825 875 925 975
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for pro- 2100 675 750 800 850 900 950 1000
ject planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation
tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-20, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the
entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm).
When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight Number of persons depending on rated load Q
(rope suspension 1:1)
Rated loads Q [kg] 100 180 225 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 525
Car width = Shaft width – Wall clearance, left – Wall clearance, right Number of persons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CW = SW – WC1 – WC2 Min. available area in elevator car [m2] 0.28 0.49 0.60 0.79 0.98 1.17 1.31
CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") – (C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW = SW – (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) – (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) Rated loads Q [kg] 630 675 750 800 825 900 975 1000 1050
Max. CW = SW – 140 mm – 140 mm Number of persons 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Min. available area in elevator car [m2] 1.45 1.59 1.73 1.87 2.01 2.15 2.29
Car width = Car gauge between rails – 2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW = CGBR – 2 x 20 mm Determination of the number of persons in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.3 (person weight 75 kg) or table 1.2.
Without dual entrance

Car depth = Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – Rear wall clearance – Installation tolerance, door side
CD = SD – DD – WC3 – IT
CD = SD – (155 to 295 mm) – 255 mm – 25 mm
Max. CD = SD – 155 mm – 255 mm – 25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width;
R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimen-
sions WC1, WC2 and WC3.

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning Data (with dual entrance) Project Planning Data (door mountings)
Modernisation
Rated load depending on car width and car depth Decision-making aid for selecting a suitable door model
Rated loads Car width CW [mm] Door model S8A / K8A 2000 C-MOD FINELINE
Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
- High-quality, elegant and efficient door - Economical solution for many common - Compact dimensions: low installation
850 series applications depth and width, ideal for narrow shafts
900
- Robust and reliable, even under - Further usage of existing swing landing - Version with asymmetric entrance
950 challenging application conditions doors possible offers additional planning freedom
Special advantages
1000 575 600 630 630 675 700
- Extensive range of fire protection - Further usage of existing swing landing
1050 575 600 630 650 675 700 725 certifications and many options doors possible
1100 575 600 630 650 700 725 750 775
1150 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 775 800
1200 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850
1250 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 850 900 Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning
1300 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 925
1350 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 950 975
TT
TT
Car depth CD [mm]
1400 600 630 650 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 950 975 1000
1450 575 630 650 700 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1025 1050 C1 TB C2
1500 575 600 630 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1025 1050 C1 TB C2
1550 600 630 675 700 750 775 825 850 900 950 975 1025 1050 Dimensioned drawing for side-opening door Dimensioned drawing for centre-opening door
1600 600 650 700 725 775 800 850 900 925 975 1000 1050 (left-opening version shown) (dual panel version shown)
1650 630 675 725 750 800 850 875 925 975 975 1050
1700 650 700 750 775 825 875 900 950 1000 1050 Door width Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) Door packet thickness
Door model Door type
1750 675 725 775 800 850 900 950 975 1025 DW [mm] C 1 [mm] C 2 [mm] DD [mm]
M2T 700 400
TT
1800 700 750 800 825 875 925 975 1025 1050
(dual panel, one-sided
1850 725 775 825 875 900 950 1000 1050 telescoping, left-opening) 750 425
E1 TB E2
1900 750 800 850 900 925 975 1025 295
S8A / K8A 800 450 1) WA1 KB 150
WA2 1)
C-E1
SB
C-E2 (incl. door frame)
1950 775 825 875 925 975 1025 1050 850 475
2000 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 900 500
2050 825 875 925 975 1025
M2T 700 400
2100 825 900 950 1000 1050 (dual panel, one-sided
750 425
telescoping, right-opening)
295
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available S8A / K8A 800 150 450
(incl. door frame)
area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). 850 475
When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
900 500
M2Z 700 400 400

(dual panel, centre-opening)
750 425 425
235
S8A / K8A 800 450 450
(incl. door frame)
850 475 475
900 500 500
M4TZ 800 250 250

(quadruple panel, telescoping,
centre-opening) 295
S8A / K8A 850 265 265
(incl. door frame)
900 275 275
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness TT, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and
maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the
various door models and door types. Further door designs possible on request.

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Project Planning Data (door mountings) Technical Data

Modernisation
Modernisation
Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning Technical data, installed components and electrical data
Door width Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) Door packet thickness
Rated load Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550
Door model Door type
DW [mm] C 1 [mm] C 2 [mm] DD [mm]
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
650 390 Max. travel height Max. TH [m] 40
2L
Dual entrance No
(dual panel, one-sided 700 415
telescoping, left-opening) Mass of car (P 450 SV) EC 1 [kg] 400 – 540 410 – 550 415 – 555 420 – 560 430 – 580 435 – 590 450 – 610 475 – 725
750 440 230
2000 C-MOD 100 (not including depth Drive Geared TW 45 C
800 465 of the door frame) Nominal power [kW] 2.7 2.9 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.9 4.3
850 490 Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 6.4 6.7 7.0 7.3 7.6 7.9 8.6 9.4
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 5.1 5.5 5.8 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.6 8.3
900 515
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 9.2 9.7 10.1 10.5 11.0 11.4 12.4 13.6
650 390
2R Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 440
(dual panel, one-sided 700 415 Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8
telescoping, right-opening)
750 440 230 Drive Gearless PMC 145-2 M PMC 145-2 L
2000 C-MOD 100 (not including depth Nominal power [kW] 2.38 3.69
800 465 of the door frame)
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 4.1 6.3
850 490
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 4.1 6.6
900 515 Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 5.9 9.1
650 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 240
4Z
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 6x6 7x6 8x6 10 x 6 12 x 6
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
centre-opening) Elevator-car guide rails T 70/B
750 225 225 230
2000 C-MOD (not including depth Counterweight guides T 50/A
800 235 235 of the door frame) Elevator-car buffer n x type 1 x 100x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
850 250 250 Counterweight buffer n x type 1 x 100x80 A
900 260 260

Rated load Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000 1050
650 205 205
4S
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 205 205 Max. travel height Max. TH [m] 40
centre-opening, symmetric) Dual entrance possible Yes
750 215 215 155
FINELINE (not including depth Mass of car (P 1000 SV) EC 1 [kg] 550 – 680 550 – 950 590 – 980 610 – 1000 630 – 1020 650 – 1050 700 – 1100
800 230 230 of the door frame)
Drive Geared TW 45 C TW 63 B
850 240 240
Nominal power [kW] 4.8 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.7 7.4 7.7
900 255 255 Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 10.2 12.3 13.6 14.6 15.6 16.7 17.4
650 255 Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 9.3 9.4 10.3 11.2 12.9 14.2 14.9
4/AS-L
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 14.7 17.7 19.6 21 22.5 24.1 25.1
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 260
centre-opening, Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 440 590 510
750 290 155
asymmetric left) Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8 5 x 10 6 x 10 7 x 10
FINELINE 145 (not including depth
800 310 of the door frame) Drive Gearless PMC 145 M / PMC 170 M / DAF 210 L PMC 170 XL / DAF 270 M
850 340 Nominal power [kW] 4.8 5.8
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 8.8 11.9
900 360
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 9.3 13.1
650 255
4/AS-R Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 12.7 17.1
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 260 Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 320
centre-opening,
750 290 155 Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8 8x8
asymmetric right)
FINELINE 145 (not including depth Elevator-car guide rails T 89/B
800 310 of the door frame)
Counterweight guides T 50/A
850 340
Elevator-car buffer n x type 2 x 100x80 A 2 x 125x80 A
900 360 Counterweight buffer n x type 1 x 125x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and 1)
Equipment features for determining the elevator car weights: Min. EC: without dual entrance, door model FINELINE, hand-rail, without mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm.
maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the Max. EC: with dual entrance, door model K8A, hand-rail, mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm. 2) For 400 V / 50 Hz. 3) The specified powers and currents are average values
various door models and door types. for orientation, are based on the actually installed components and increase depending on the project according to elevator control unit, the number of landings, the type and
number of operating and indicator elements, the car lighting and other electrical power consumers (e.g. fans).

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Elevator Car Design Elevator Car Design

Modernisation
Modernisation
Colours / materials Design variants
VERTICAL A VERTICAL B VERTICAL C
Colours / materials
WVSG WVCW WVCC WVSE
Galvanised steel Traffic White RAL 9016 / Colour RAL / Leather / stainless steel
powder coating powder coating
WVSL WVSF WVSA

Linen / stainless steel Grain 220/stainless steel Grain 220/stainless steel
ferritic austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting systems
Mirrors Galvanised steel Traffic White / Grain 220

powder coating stainless steel
SpotLED SlimLED Without lighting WVSG WVCW WVSF
Traffic white RAL 9016 / Traffic white RAL 9016 / Traffic white RAL 9016 /
powder coating, CWFS powder coating, CWSL powder coating, CWNL
stainless steel grain 220, stainless steel grain 220,
Half mirror Wall
CSFS CSSL
BTHM WVSG WVCW WVSF
Car ceiling with lighting systems
Mirror,
CWFS CWFS CSSL
entire Flooring material
height Skirt guard
BBWD SBAA SBAA SBSS
Flooring material
FNES FRKB FRKG FRIC
without FRKG FRKB
Black Stone / rubber Kayar Black / rubber Kayar Grey / rubber Ice / rubber
Hand rail
without HSRE + HSLT HCIL
Mirrors
FPDG FOEO
without BTHM BBWD
Dove Grey / vinyl Dark Brushed Oak / PVC Prepared for flooring material
of up to 25 mm to be provided
by customer
Hand rail
Handrails
The elevator car can also be supplied in galvanised sheet metal as the design for customer lining. Please specify the customer-designed
equipment with weight.
VERTICAL
Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel

Grain 220 dia. 40 mm Grain 220 dia. 40 mm Grain 220 dia. 40 mm
straight version bowed version bowed version, all round
Rear wall, side walls Rear wall, side walls L-layout, U-layout
Skirt guards
Grain 220 stainless steel Aluminium

The elevator car is prepared for installation of a COP (car operating panel) as installation panel by the customer. On account of the self-
50 mm 30 mm supporting construction no through-holes or openings may be provided in the walls (exception: cable lead-through).
Optional SBSS SBAA

LEMoS® LEMoS®
Car Design Options Lighting System
Elevator car P450SV / P1000SV design options

Modernisation
Modernisation
VERTICAL VERTICAL
Colours / materials Code Colours / materials Code
selection selection LED Lighting
Through the use of highly efficient and
Walls (VERTICAL design line) Mirror on the rear wall of the car energy-saving LED lighting, energy
Half mirror savings up to 78% over fluorescent
Galvanised steel WVSG BTHM
from height of hand-rail to cover lamps can be achieved.
Traffic White RAL 9016 / Full height mirror
WVCW BBWD
powder coating without dots pattern
Colour / RAL
WVCC
powder coating Handrails in the elevator car
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm version, straight
Leather / stainless steel WVSE
on rear wall, rear HSRE
on side wall, right HSRI
Linen / stainless steel WVSL
on side wall, left HSLT
Grain 220 / stainless steel Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version
WVSF
ferritic on rear wall, rear HBRE
Grain 220 / stainless steel on side wall, right HBRI
WVSA
austenitic on side wall, left HBLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version, surrounding
Car front walls L-layout (on rear and
HCIL
side wall, opposite CIOP)
Galvanised steel DPSG
U-layout (on three sides) HCIU
W
Traffic White RAL 9016 / White LED
DPCW
powder coating Skirt guards in the elevator car
Colour / RAL Stainless steel grain 220 h = 50 mm
DPCC SBSS
powder coating without lighting
Leather / stainless steel DPSE Aluminium h = 30 mm

SBAA
without lighting
Linen / stainless steel DPSL
Grain 220 / stainless steel

DPSF
ferritic
Grain 220 / stainless steel
DPSA W
austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting

SpotLED Traffic White RAL 9016 /
CWFS
powder coating
SpotLED grain 220 /
CSFS
austenitic stainless steel
LED strips
SlimLED Traffic White RAL 9016 /
powder coating
CWSL With indirect lighting over the skirt guard,
the LED lighting system offers you a
SlimLED grain 220 /
CSSL special accent with soft light. Our atmos-
austenitic stainless steel
Without lighting Traffic White
pheric RGB LED lighting system offers you
CWNL a broad spectrum of colored light.
RAL 9016 / powder coating
Flooring material in the elevator car

Black Stone / rubber FNES
Kayar Black / rubber FRKB
Kayar Grey / rubber FRKG
Ice / rubber FRIC RGB LED:
Dove Grey / vinyl FPDG all colors available on the skirt
Dark Brushed Oak / PVC FOEO guard
Without flooring material
Option


Solutions for modernisation with components Solutions for modernisation with components
thicknesses and installation dimen-

Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components

sions are also used, in many cases
this optimization makes it is possi-
Solutions for modernization with components UK ble to use a door with a width of
900 mm and a floor area which fulfil
the requirements for a type of eleva-
The elevator markets in Germany and Whenever a modernization is planned,  Bracket fastenings (masonry situa- tor that can be used by the disabled.
many parts of Europe have a high num- it is therefore necessary to check the tion)
 Door openings
ber of existing installations, some of current situation regarding the installa-
 Shaft openings (position and size)
which are more than 25 years old. Due tion in terms of up-to-dateness, by us- When the existing door openings on
to the considerable age of these instal- ing the available drawings and techni-  Existing concrete foundations in ma- the floors can continue to be used as
lations and safety-related considera- cal documents (register), and to chine room and pit (retain or re- a result of appropriate planning, this
tions, as well as the need for necessary document the actual status with photo- move) means a considerable reduction in the
repairs and conversions, many of these graphs.  Dust-free conversion additional measures taken by the
installations have to be fundamentally Modernization concepts, the selection customer. Old hinged-door frames
 Access to the building during the
renovated. It may also be necessary to of components and schedules must al- can be retained and the sliding
conversion
modernize existing elevators as part of ways be coordinated in detail. doors placed behind them. By panel- Figure 6: DAF210 with adaptation to TW63
building renovation programmes and  Transport paths in the building for ling the frames, the closure to the frame with rope guard
When installations are modernized, ex- the conversion masonry on the floor can then be
changes of use. In such cases, the in-
perience shows that noise behaviour in made dust-free.
stallation is often completely replaced. … Figure 4: LIOP, LOP, LIP
the building can change perceptibly in
The market potential in terms of connection with changes made to the This means that, in the area surround-
verter is also state-of-the-art prac-
modernization is therefore significantly elevator. ing the modernization, it must be possi-
tice and energy-efficient solutions
greater than for new installations which ble to adapt the solutions and packages
It is therefore recommended that noise with power regeneration are used
are either in planning or have already flexibly to the particular application
and passenger comfort should be more frequently even in the lower
been fitted. conditions of the installation.
measured before the conversion, in or- range of performance. Machine base
The majority of these installations still der for these measurements to then be Some requirements that should be tak- frames for adaptation to local condi-
have a machine room, which it would used as comparison measurements af- en into consideration are detailed be- tions can also be supplied in many
then be advisable to keep in service, ter the modernization is completed. low. Some requirements may also arise cases.
even in the case of modernization. in combination:
Because the total amount of time and In terms of service and mainte-
Modernizations which, without a com- resources required for modernization  Optimization of the elevator car size nance, both drive concepts are com-
pelling reason, forgo the continued use is not limited only to the elevator com-
With an elevator car that can be flex- parable, since brake manufacturers
of an existing machine room, should ponents, the surrounding area should
ibly configured with integrated car can alternatively also supply brakes
therefore be carefully examined in or- also be included in the examination Figure 7: DAF270 with adaptation to
sling for gauge reduction, the inter- with manual release for gearless
der to check that measures in place for during the planning stage. TW130 frame with rope guard
nal car area can be optimized, given brakes.
rescuing elevator passengers, mainte- The following general conditions should the available shaft cross section.
nance and installation inspection are Gears can be placed either with an
also be considered: When doors with corresponding pad
not encumbered as a result. Complete adapter onto the existing frame or
replacement with an MRL system is  Changes that affect structural as- onto the foundation. For using gear-
frequently proposed as a moderniza- pects (ceiling loads, wall fastenings less drives in the machine room,
tion solution when suppliers are not and pit stresses) corresponding solutions with an op-
Figure 3: Panelled hinged-door frame with tional traction sheave cover are avail-
able to offer project-related and cus-  Further usage of existing ceiling and telescopic door
tomized solutions. wall openings able.
All solutions are designed with ap-
 Operating and indicator elements
propriate insulation for sound-opti-
On the landing, LOP, LIOP, LIP pan- mized installation.
els with integrated electrics for sim-
ple cabling to the control system can When adjacent drives are replaced,
Figure 8: DAF210 as a replacement
be fitted as desired on the door solutions with a gearless system and for lower
frame or the masonry as flat attach- traction sheave in the shaft are avail-
ment elements with different button able, which are placed in the wall
opening.  Drum drive as a special solution
designs. The requirements of EN 81-70
are then also met. Where space is very restricted, the
solution with a drum drive is a possi-
 Gearless or geared
ble alternative to the hydraulic or
For the drive, a check must be made traction sheave elevator. EN 81-1 al-
to see whether an existing gear with so describes the standard require-
large traction sheave should be rements for drum-drive elevators.
placed by a gear with large traction Worm gears are generally used for
sheave or whether a gearless system the drive, while the use of gearless
with 2:1 suspension and smaller drives is limited in terms of rated
traction sheave is used. In moderni- load due to the required diameter of
zation, the use of a frequency con- Figure 5: ModKit with PMC 170 the traction sheave.
Figure 2: Elevator car with integrated car
Figure 1: Shaft utilisation sling and flexible dimensions

Technical Report
Anzeige_Liftronic_eco_1 05.01.1970 3:27 Uhr Seite 5
Technical Report
Technical report Technical report

Solutions for modernisation with components Solutions for modernisation with components

 Installation part replacement  Structural aspects case, comprehensive planning is re- brake, or via an emergency brake In the process, flexibly adjusted car di-
When the loads on an installation are
quired, which, in many cases, should system (NBS) on the gear. mensions can be assessed for opti-
When replacing parts, a check must
increased, a change in or recalcula- be combined with simultaneous re- mum space utilisation.
be made to see whether components
such as rails, brackets and the coun- tion of the statics is always neces- placement of the control system, Summary In the report, the different concepts
terweight can, in fact, be used again. sary. In many cases, one solution since the majority of control system In Germany and in parts of Europe, the will also be assessed on the basis of
If they can, a considerable amount here can be to distribute the loading developers offer A3 functionality as market volume in terms of moderniza- examples, in order for a technical and
of installation time and effort, using onto the shaft ceiling via a load dis- a pre-integrated feature in their cur- tion is significantly greater than the economic assessment of the solution
dowels and transporting material, tribution beam. This measure can al-
rent control systems. The solution is market for new installations. options to be made.
can be avoided. As a result, it may so be helpful on occasions when, be-
cause of the installation situation, often easier to implement than net- In the view of the operators and in re-
also be possible to reduce the length Types of modernization may turn out
of time required for the conversion. new ceiling openings have to be working the different components spect of safety for servicing personnel,
to be very different according to the lo-
created. The drives are protected with additional detection systems. continuing to use existing machine
 Modular modernization
from vibration when placed on these
cal situation and the particular supplier.
When a control system is later re- rooms is to be preferred, provided that
Based on an overall concept for the beams. placed, these components may no Approaches to modernization range
modernization, it is possible to im- this space is not otherwise required for
To further optimise the noise situa- longer be required. from the typical replacement of indi-
plement the measures in several tion, it may be advisable in certain reasons of building use (e.g addition).
When implementing the require- vidual components to modular and
steps, when this is not possible in cases to also provide additional anti- In existing installations, headrooms
one step for budgetary reasons, for ments of A3, it may be easier to for- scalable replacement solutions, through
vibrating elements underneath the and shaft pits are generally sufficiently
example. It is then ensured that, on go a levelling operation with early- to the complete replacement of the
beams. In this case, the rubber-met- large, so that measures for temporary
completion of the entire moderniza- al connections should be designed opening doors and demonstrate via entire elevator system.
tion, the installation features state- safety spaces are not necessary.
accordingly. rope elongation that, due to the buff- All these solution options should be
Figure 9: DAF270 with traction sheave in of-the-art technology and no unnec- A special application where space is
the shaft When individual components are re- ering during loading, relevelling is viewed in terms of a project in order
essary costs are incurred through restricted may take the form of a solu-
placed, all components to be not necessary. In this case, it is suf- for a solution to be found, on the basis
repeatedly replacing components. tion with a drum drive.
changed and the different effects on
ficient if the installation is securely of a technical and economic assess-
 Energy efficiency the overall system during replace-
ment must be assessed. stopped at the landing via a safety ment, that is customized to the re- LiftEquip GmbH
Depending of the type of use (num-
 UCM (unintended car movement)
brake, as found on the gearless sys- quirements of both customer and op- Elevator Components GmbH,
ber of runs, equipment, etc.), the fo-
tem in the form of an operational erator. D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
cus must be placed on reducing ei- As part of a modernization opera-
ther the travelling requirement or tion, a check must always be made
the standby requirement. In VDI to see what measures must be im-
4707 Part 2, the process has now plemented in relation to the require-
been defined as to how, using com- ments according to A3. Replacing a
ponent characteristic values, an en- drive always makes it necessary to
ergy efficiency analysis can be carried carry out an assessment according
out even as part of the moderniza- to EN 81-1:A3 (UCM) and implement
Figure 10: Drum drive with gear TW130 tion planning (forecast tool). the necessary measures. In this
LIFT-REPORT 40. Jahrg. (2014) Heft 1 49

LED-Ceiling lighting
Own Notes LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL
Lightning
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ LED Spots / SlimLED Panel 218
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

LED-Ceiling lighting LED-Ceiling lighting
LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL

Lighting
Lighting
LED lighting - Slim panels in different sizes and with
for modernisation too an efficient installation concept for quick SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 mm
replacement are suitable as alternatives The power consumption is just 24 watts.
The market wants energy-efficient lifts. to existing lighting. In elevator cars up to a rated load of
Apart from the long service life of more 1,600 kg, one SlimLED PANEL light suffi-
than 50,000 operating hours and taking Depending on the car design, the lighting ces. For larger elevator cars, two or more
all considerations on the subject of ener- intensity may be sufficient to guarantee SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 lights can
gy efficiency into account, the conclusion a brightness of 100 lux on the floor. In be used and grouped together or freely
is inescapable that greatest savings po- addition, LED lighting can be dimmed to SpotsLED positioned on the ceiling. SlimLED PANEL SlimLED PANEL
tential can be achieved in lift car lighting ensure that the sensation of brightness is Dimension 300 x 300 x 16 mm Diemension 620 x 620 x 16 mm
in standby mode with additional periods pleasant in relation to the fittings.

of disconnection. SlimLED PANEL 620 x 620 mm Baseplate with numerous
LED lighting with spotlights or a slim Emergency lighting with external power The power consumption is 46 watts. With mounting options and ad-
justment ranges for precise
panel are practically standard in new lifts. supply is possible as an option with slim this higher power, even larger elevator
Car ceiling
300
alignment
620
During modernisation, the existing spot- panels. cars up to a rated load of 4,000 kg can be
lights are easy to replace 1:1 with LED suffi-ciently and homogeneously illumina-
spotlights. ted with just one SlimLED PANEL light. 20
300
620
SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 mm
M3 R
3 Dimensions in mm
16
LED spotlights can be installed in the Technical Data 9950 001 0871 Power consumption 5,5 W Technical Data 9950 001 1198 9950 001 1352 Output power max. 50 W
same arrangement as halogen spotlights Dimension Connection Halogen-free version Dimension 300 x 300 mm 620 x 620 mm Mains frequency range 50 / 60 Hz
in a suspended ceiling or directly in the Light exit area 50 mm, round Storage temperature - 10° to + 40° C Light-emitting surface 260 x 260 mm 580 x 580 mm Certifications all common EN standards
car ceiling. Diameter 73 mm Technical data of external lamp ballast Frame width Ambient temperature - 25° to + 45° C
20 mm
The number of spotlights depends on the Aluminium frame 12 mm Dimensions (aluminium) Cable length 2.000 mm
car size and design of the wall and floor Installation height 36 mm Width x Height x Depth 55,5 x 125,2 x 100 mm Dimensions WxDxH 300 x 300 x 16 mm 620 x 620 x 16 mm transformer – car distributor (3-wire, halogen-free, open end, can be individually
surfaces. In 630 kg cars four spotlights Weight 180 g Connection values Weight 1,2 kg 3,7 kg shortened)
Materials Input voltage 85 - 264 VAC Cable length 6.000 mm Protection class -
are sufficient; in a 1000 kg car six IP20
Housing Aluminium, anodised, Output voltage 12 VDC light – transformer (2-wire, halogen-free, open end, can be individually shortened) transformer
spotlights provide adequate continuous
with integrated heat sink Power output 75 W Protection class II / protective insulation Designed with step protection
illumination. Emergency light function via 12 V external
Cover plate Clear polycarbo- Mains frequency range 47 - 63 Hz
nate and satinised, voltage supply in the event power failure
light-dispersing acrylic
Certification Complying with all Scope of supply
common EN standards Materials
Union nut (PMMA)
Environmental conditions Housing aluminium, white • SlimLED PANEL (panel light), incl. mounting carrier
Lighting equipment Cover screen wwhite polycarbonate, light diffusing acrylic plate and cable
Temperature -10° to + 60° C
Number of LEDs 3 Stück (PMMA) • Transformer / power supply unit, incl. cable
Air humidity 20% - 90% (without
Power output per LED 1,8 Watt Mounting support plate galvanised steel
condensation) • Fastening material
Installation opening Energy efficiency Protection class IP 40 Light source / panel light
min. diameter 64 mm A
max. diameter 68 mm
category Number of LEDs 120 pieces 240 pieces
Colour temperature 4 700° Kelvin Energy efficiency class A
Lighting current 230 Lm Colour temperature 4 000° K ± 250 K
Luminous efficiency 42 Im/W Luminous flux 1550 lm 3200 lm
Finebinning ± 250° K Colour rendering index
>80%
Colour rendering index (CRI)
>80%
(CRI) Power consumption 24 W 46 W
Viewing angle 150° Protection class IP20
Downlight housing
Intensity of current 550 mA Transformer / power supply unit (external)
Operating voltage 12 V Dimensions 103 x 67 x 21 mm
Power supply Mains adapter Input voltage 110 - 240 VAC
High energy efficiency class High energy efficiency class
100 - 240V, 50 - 60 Hz Output voltage 12 VDC

Safety Calendar
With us you can plan
September 2017 October 2017 November 2017 December 2017
Calendar
Basic safety practices for lifts
w n l o ad: CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
3
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
3
D o rg
35 1 2
9 10
39
3
1
8
44 1 2 3 4 5 48 1 2
9 10
aisbl.o
36 4 5 6 7 8 40 2 4 5 6 7 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 49 4 5 6 7 8
la-
www.e 18 19
37 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 41 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 46 13 14 15 16 17 50 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
38 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 42 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 47 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 51 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
39 25 26 27 28 29 30 43 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 48 27 28 29 30 52 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
44 30 31
January 2018 February 2018 March 2018 April 2018
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
BASIC SAFETY PRACTICES

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 1 2 3 4 9 1 2 3 4 13 1
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 15 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 8 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
FOR LIFTS
5 29 30 31 9 26 27 28 13 26 27 28 29 30 31 17 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
18 30
May 2018 June 2018 July 2018 August 2018

18 1 2 3 4 5 6 22 1 2 3 26 1 31 1 2 3 4 5
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 27 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 32 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
20 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 28 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 33 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 25 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 29 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 34 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
22 28 29 30 31 26 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 35 27 28 29 30 31
31 30 31
September 2018 October 2018 November 2018 December 2018

35 1 2 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 44 1 2 3 4 48 1 2
36 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 41 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 45 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 49 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
37 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 46 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 50 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
38 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 43 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 47 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 51 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
39 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 44 29 30 31 48 26 27 28 29 30 52 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 31
Holiday 2018 School holidays Germany 2018

Date Holiday Federal state Christmas Winter Easter Pentecost Summer Autumn Christmas
01.01.2018 Neujahrstag Nationwide School year 2017/18 2018/19
Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, BW 22.12.-5.1. - 26.3.-6.4. 22.5.-2.6. 26.7.-8.9. 29.10.-2.11. 24.12.-5.1.
6. Jan. 2018 Heilige Drei Könige
Sachsen-Anhalt 29.10.-2.11. /
BY 23.12.-5.1. 12.2.-16.2. 26.3.-7.4. 22.5.-2.6. 30.7.-10.9. 22.12.-5.1.
30. März 2018 Karfreitag Nationwide 21.11.
01.04.2018 Ostersonntag Brandenburg BE 21.12.-2.1. 5.2.-10.2. 26.3.-6.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 5.7.-17.8. 22.10.-2.11. 22.12.-5.1.
02.04.2018 Ostermontag Nationwide BB 21.12.-2.1. 5.2.-10.2. 26.3.-6.4. 30.4./11.5. 5.7.-18.8. 22.10.-2.11. 21.12.-5.1.
01.05.2018 Tag der Arbeit Nationwide HB 22.12.-6.1. 1./2.2. 19.3.-3.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-13.10. 24.12.-4.1.
10.05.2018 Christi Himmelfahrt Nationwide HH 22.12.-5.1. 2.2. 5.3.-16.3. 30.4./7.-11.5. 5.7.-15.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1.
20.05.2018 Pfingstsonntag Brandenburg HE 24.12.-13.1. - 26.3.-7.4. - 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-13.10. 24.12.-12.1.
21.05.2018 Pfingstmontag Nationwide MV 21.12.-3.1. 5.2.-16.2. 26.3.-4.4. 11./18.-22.5. 9.7.-18.8.
8.-13.10. /
24.12.-5.1.
Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, Hessen, 1.-2.11.
31.05.2018 Fronleichnam Nordrhein-Westfalen, Rheinland-Pfalz, NI 22.12.-5.1. 1./2.2. 19.3.-3.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-12.10. 24.12.-4.1.
Saarland NRW 27.12.-6.1. - 26.3.-7.4. 22.5.-25.5. 16.7.-28.8. 15.10.-27.10. 21.12.-4.1.
15.08.2018 Mariä Himmelfahrt Bayern (kathol. Gebiete), Saarland RP 22.12.-9.1. - 26.3.-6.4. - 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1.
Tag der Deutschen SL 21.12.-5.1. 12.2.-17.2. 26.3.-6.4. - 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1.
03.10.2018 Nationwide
Einheit SN 23.12.-2.1. 12.2.-23.2. 29.3.-6.4. 11./19.-22.5. 2.7.-10.8. 8.10.-20.10. 22.12.-4.1.
Brandenburg, Mecklenburg-Vorpommern, ST 21.12.-3.1. 5.2.-9.2. 26.3.-31.3. 30.4./11.-19.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-12.10. 19.12.-4.1.
31.10.2018 Reformationstag SH
Sachsen, Sachsen-Anhalt, Thüringen 21.12.-6.1. - 29.3.-13.4. 11.5. 9.7.-18.8. 1.10.-19.10. 21.12.-4.1.
Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, Nordrhein- TH 22.12.-5.1. 5.2.-9.2. 26.3.-7.4. 11.5. 2.7.-11.8. 1.10.-13.10. 21.12.-4.1.
01.11.2018 Allerheiligen
Westfalen, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland
21.11.2018 Buß- und Bettag Sachsen
25.12.2018 1. Weihnachtstag Nationwide
26.12.2018 2. Weihnachtstag Nationwide
European Lift Association; 44 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux, box 1, B-1160 Brussels All information without guarantee
Tel.: +32 (0) 2 779 50 82 Fax.: +32 (0) 2 772 16 85

LiftEquip TEAM LiftEquip TEAM
The TEAM of LiftEquip We're here for you
Managing Director Order management E-Mail: ordermanagement@liftequip.de

LiftEquip TEAM
LiftEquip TEAM
Thorsten Elsässer Nida Koyuncu Melanie Menzler Matthias Bayha Jochen Digel
Managing Director Order Management Order Management Head of Order Hotline

Management Frequency Inverter
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2928 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2963 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2894 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2962 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2020
M: + 49 (0) 173 / 752 3037 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 218 2946 melanie.menzler@ M: + 49 (0) 172 / 745 6004
thorsten.elsaesser@ nida.koyuncu@liftequip.de liftequip.de matthias.bayha@
liftequip.de liftequip.de
Support E-Mail: produktservice@liftequip.de E-Mail: claim@liftequip.de E-Mail: termine@liftequip.de

Volker Lenzner Norbert Blum Anita Rank Frank Jobst Thorsten Thomas Oelschlägel
Woitanowski
Head of Product Service Sales Support Quality Management Scheduling
Product Service Senior Technical
Manager
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2967 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2473 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2294 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2940 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2071
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2893
M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1166 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1440 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4988 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4987 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1436
M: + 49 (0) 173 / 895 5140
volker.lenzner@liftequip.de norbert.blum@liftequip.de anita.rank@liftequip.de frank.jobst@liftequip.de thomas.oelschlaegel@
thorsten.woitanowski@
liftequip.de
liftequip.de
Sales D-A-CH E-Mail: vertrieb@liftequip.de Sales D-A-CH E-Mail: vertrieb@liftequip.de

Markus Bruckmeyer Thomas Bäzner Jochen Böhmler Volker Hermenau Christopher Clark
Head of Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH Trainee
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2935 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2986 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2987 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2975 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2970
M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1426 M: +49 (0) 172 / 735 0058 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2040 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4090 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 200 7742
markus.bruckmeyer@ thomas.baezner@ jochen.boehmler@ volker.hermenau@ christopher.clark@
liftequip.de liftequip.de liftequip.de liftequip.de liftequip.de
Sales Export E-Mail: salesexport@liftequip.de Sales Export E-Mail: salesexport@liftequip.de

Günter Stoll Ewelina Czarnik Maria Kairidou Patrick Schoch Julian Wirtl
Head of Sales Sales Export Sales Export Sales Export Sales Export
Export
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2969 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2968 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2027 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2966 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964
M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1839 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1699 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4100 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 3838 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 675 4018
guenter.stoll@liftequip.de ewelina.czarnik@ maria.kairidou@ patrick.schoch@ julian.wirtl@liftequip.de
liftequip.de liftequip.de liftequip.de

27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components

2
Bernhaeuser Straße 45
D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2929
1
Fax: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2971

More than you expect ...
E-Mail: kontakt@liftequip.de
0
Internet: www.liftequip.com

01 ElevatorComponents en Interaktiv-09-2017

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

01 ElevatorComponents en Interaktiv-09-2017

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Elevator Components

Best Quality - Made in Germany

More than you expect ...

Gearless Machine, PMC- and DAF-Series 59

2 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 3

As usual, we will be presenting our comprehensi-

Apart from several updates of technical information,

4 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 5

Gears Gearless Inverter Modernisation

ModKit MO61 S/E

6 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 7

Safety gear frames and safety technology Overall system in focus

8 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 9

Configuration program LEKalk 3.0

10 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 11

Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production

Production at the elevator specialist

Attractive price-performance ratio

Perfection all the way to delivery

12 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 13

For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as

Consulting and telephone hotline

Proximity to our customers

14 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 15

Inquiry Sheet LEKalk 3.0

Page 1 of 2 Issue: 12/2016

After selecting the motor and

16 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 17

LEKalk 3.0 LEKalk 3.0

LEKalk 3.0 calculates the trac-

The design is for submission

You can add even more compo-

18 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 19

Customer and Training Centre

20 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 21

Own Notes Technical Report

Technical Report - From components to home lifts

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Uniform colour assignment for

22 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 23

Technical Report Technical Report

Technical Report - From components to home lifts

24 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 25

Own Notes TW- and W-Series

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Product description 28

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Drum drives 52

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Colouring for all Drives 100

26 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 27

TW- and W-Series EN 81-

*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension

28 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 29

TW- and W-Series TW- and W-Series

rated load (kg)

2200 4000 TW160

1400 TW130 TW160 2000

0,5 0,8 1,0 1,3 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,3 2,5

Data can vary depending on car weight and travel height

30 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 31

TW- and W-Series TW- and W-Series

Travel height 25 m 40 m Travel height 25 m 40 m

TW45C EN 81- TW45C

The ideal solution for light loads

Brake release lever

Hand wheel mm D270 (plastic)

34 Issue 09/2017 www.liftequip.com 35